WO2023049779A1 - An aqueous coating composition and a package coated therewith - Google Patents
An aqueous coating composition and a package coated therewith Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023049779A1 WO2023049779A1 PCT/US2022/076825 US2022076825W WO2023049779A1 WO 2023049779 A1 WO2023049779 A1 WO 2023049779A1 US 2022076825 W US2022076825 W US 2022076825W WO 2023049779 A1 WO2023049779 A1 WO 2023049779A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- acrylic material
- coating composition
- aqueous coating
- group
- alkyl group
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
- C09D133/00—Coating compositions based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Coating compositions based on derivatives of such polymers
- C09D133/04—Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
- C09D133/06—Homopolymers or copolymers of esters of esters containing only carbon, hydrogen and oxygen, the oxygen atom being present only as part of the carboxyl radical
- C09D133/10—Homopolymers or copolymers of methacrylic acid esters
- C09D133/12—Homopolymers or copolymers of methyl methacrylate
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F265/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00
- C08F265/04—Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00 on to polymers of esters
- C08F265/06—Polymerisation of acrylate or methacrylate esters on to polymers thereof
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F8/00—Chemical modification by after-treatment
- C08F8/30—Introducing nitrogen atoms or nitrogen-containing groups
- C08F8/32—Introducing nitrogen atoms or nitrogen-containing groups by reaction with amines
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
- C09D151/00—Coating compositions based on graft polymers in which the grafted component is obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds; Coating compositions based on derivatives of such polymers
- C09D151/003—Coating compositions based on graft polymers in which the grafted component is obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds; Coating compositions based on derivatives of such polymers grafted on to macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions only involving unsaturated carbon-to-carbon bonds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F8/00—Chemical modification by after-treatment
- C08F8/44—Preparation of metal salts or ammonium salts
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to an aqueous coating composition and to a package coated on at least a portion thereof with a coating, the coating being derived from an aqueous coating composition.
- the present disclosure also extends aqueous coating compositions, post repair spray coating composition and to a method of making a coating composition.
- epoxy-based coatings and polyvinyl chloride-based coatings have been used in the past to coat the interior of metal cans to prevent corrosion.
- the recycling of materials containing polyvinyl chloride or related halide-containing vinyl polymers can generate toxic by-products.
- these polymers may be formulated with epoxy-functional plasticizers.
- epoxy-based coatings are prepared from monomers such as bisphenol A and bisphenol A diglycidylether ("BADGE'). BPA is perceived as being harmful to human health and it is therefore desirable to eliminate it from coatings.
- BPA diglycidyl ethers of bisphenol A
- BPF bisphenol F
- an aqueous coating composition comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; wherein the coating composition is substantially free of formaldehyde; and wherein when only one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I, then the wt% ratio of the acrylamide containing acrylic material to the non-acrylamide containing acrylic material is less than 1.2:1.
- an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; wherein the first monomer component and/or the second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
- an aqueous coating composition comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group, wherein
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; and wherein at least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material.
- an aqueous coating composition comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
- the present disclosure also extends to a package, such as a food or beverage can, coated on at least a portion thereof with a coating, the coating being derived from each of the aqueous coating compositions disclosed herein.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise an acrylic material and a further acrylic material.
- references to a “acrylic material” refer equally to an acrylic material and to a further acrylic material.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise any suitable acrylic material.
- the acrylic material is suitably formed from an acrylic monomer. Suitable acrylic monomers will be well known to a person skilled in the art.
- the acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising more than one acrylic monomer. Suitable acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, alkyl (alk)acrylate, such as Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate, for example, Ci to Ge alkyl (meth)acrylate, and (alk)acrylic acid, such as (Ci to Ge alk)acrylic acid.
- the acrylic monomers may comprise a functional group, such as an acid group.
- the acrylic monomer may comprise acrylic acid or methacrylic acid.
- the acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an additional ethylenically unsaturated monomer (such as a vinyl monomer).
- additional ethylenically unsaturated monomers include, but are not limited to, aryl substituted ethylenically unsaturated monomers such as, for example, styrene; unsaturated carboxylic acids or diacids (or anhydrides), such as maleic acid (or anhydride) or itaconic acid (or anhydride); and combinations thereof.
- the acrylic material may comprise styrene.
- Additional ethylenically unsaturated monomers include C2 to Ge alkenes, such as ethylene, propylene, and/or butylene, for example.
- Suitable acrylic monomers and/or ethylenically unsaturated monomers may comprise a cyclic alkyl group, for example, isobornyl(methyl)acrylate or monomers derived from isosorbide and/or tetramethyl cyclobutene.
- monomers derived from isosorbide it is meant functionalised isosorbide, suitably, the pendent hydroxyl groups have been reacted to form acid functionalised isosorbide, acrylic functionalised isosorbide epoxy functionalised isosorbide and/or vinyl functionalised isosorbide.
- monomers derived from tetramethyl cyclobutene it is meant functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene, suitably acid tetramethyl cyclobutene, acrylic functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene, epoxy functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene and/or vinyl functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) comprises acidic functionality.
- the acrylic material comprises pendant acid groups, such as pendant carboxylic acid groups, for example. This may be achieved, by way of example, by including an acid functional acrylic monomer, such as acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, for example, in the preparation of the acrylic material.
- alkacrylate As used herein, “(alk)acrylate”, ”(meth)acrylate” and like terms are used conventionally and herein to refer to both alkacrylate and acrylate, such as methacrylate and acrylate.
- acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate; methyl methacrylate; ethyl acrylate; ethyl methacrylate; propyl acrylate; propyl methacrylate; butyl acrylate; butyl methacrylate, isobornyl acrylate, isobornyl methacrylate, hydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate; ethylene glycol diacrylate; ethylene glycol dimethacrylate; 1 ,6-hexanediol diacrylate; 1 ,6- hexanediol dimethacrylate; 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate; 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate; allyl methacrylate; benzyl methacrylate;
- the acrylic material may comprise acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, ethyl acrylate, ethyl methacrylate, butyl methacrylate, butyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxyethyl acrylate or combinations thereof.
- the acrylic material may comprise acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, ethyl methacrylate, ethyl acrylate or combinations thereof.
- the acrylic material may comprise acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, ethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate or combinations thereof.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise any suitable amount of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise from 2 to 75 wt%, such as from 2 to 60 wt%, such as from 2 to 55 wt%, such as from 2 to 50 wt% methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material).
- the acrylic material or the further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an optionally substituted styrene or a styrene-mimicking ethylen ically unsaturated monomer.
- the acrylic material is suitably formed from a substituted styrene monomer component.
- the substituted styrene monomer component may comprise a 2, 3 or 4- alkyl or aryl substituted styrene.
- Suitable substituted styrene monomers include but are not limited to, alpha-methyl styrene; 3,4-alpha-methyl styrene; methyl styrenes such as 2-methyl styrene, 4-methyl styrene (vinyl toluene) and the like; dimethyl styrenes such as 2,3-dimethyl styrene; 2-ethyl styrene; 4-tertbutylstyrene; 4-methoxystyrene; 4-phenylstyrene; 4-phenoxy styrene; 4-propyl styrene; 4-benzylstyrene; 4-cyclohexyl styrene; 4-dodecyl styrene; 4-(phenyl butyl)styrene; 2-methyl-4-isopopyl styrene; 2-ethyl-4-benzy
- the styrene-mimicking ethylenically unsaturated monomers may comprise an optionally saturated monocyclic group, for example, benzyl acrylate, benzyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate or cyclohexyl methacrylate.
- the acrylic material or the further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising terpene monomers or derivatives thereof, rosin monomers or derivatives thereof, cardanol monomers or derivatives thereof.
- terpene monomers or derivatives thereof include but are not limited to, monoterpenes such as a-pinene, p-pinene, camphene, sabinene, limonene and myrcene; sesquiterpenes such as bisabolene and nerolidol; and diterpenes.
- rosin monomers or derivates thereof include but are not limited to, rosin, rosin acids, abietic acid, neabietic acid, palustric acid, pimaric acid, levopimaric acid, maleopimaric acid, fumaropimaric acid, isopimaric acid, rosin- formaldehyde resin, rosin (meth)acrylate, rosin alcohol and rosin phenol.
- cardanol monomers or derivatives thereof of include but are not limited to cardanol, cardanyl (meth)acrylate, cardanol (meth)acrylate, anacardic acid, cardanol glycidyl ether, cardanol-formaldehyde resin, cardanol epoxies, cardanol phenols and cardanol alcohols.
- the acrylic material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of styrene.
- substantially free in relation to styrene is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- essentially free in relation to styrene is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.01 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise no, i.e. 0 wt%, styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- the acrylic material may be completely free of styrene.
- the acrylic material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of Cs to Ge alkenes.
- substantially free in relation to Cs to Ge alkenes is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 10 wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- essentially free in relation to C2 to Ge alkenes is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.1wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes or even no, i.e. 0 wt%, C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- the acrylic material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of ethylene.
- substantially free in relation to ethylene is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 10 wt% of ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- essentially free in relation to ethylene is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- completely free in relation to ethylene is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.1 wt% of ethylene, or even, no, i.e. 0 wt%, ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, or a -Y-O-Z group
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, or a -Y-O-Z group
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or H;
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- R 1 may represent H or C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Ce alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group.
- R 1 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, I- propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.
- R 1 may represent H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
- R 1 may represent H.
- R 2 may represent H or C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Ce alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group.
- R 2 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, I- propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.
- R 2 may represent H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
- R 2 may represent H.
- X 1 may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group.
- X 1 may represent methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.
- X 1 may represent a C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
- X 1 may represent a -Y-O-Z group.
- X 2 may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group, or H.
- X 2 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.
- X 2 may represent a H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
- X 2 may represent a -Y-O-Z group.
- X 2 may represent H.
- X 3 may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group, or H.
- X 3 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.
- X 3 may represent a H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
- X 3 may represent H.
- Y may represent a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, such as C1-C10 alkylene bridging group, such as Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group, such as Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group, such as C1-C4 alkylene bridging group.
- Y may represent methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene or decylene.
- Y may represent a methylene, ethylene or propylene group.
- Z may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as C2-C7 alkyl group, such as C2-C6 alkyl group, or H.
- Z may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.
- Z may represent H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
- R 1 , X 1 and X 2 may each be selected independently from the above lists to for any combination of an acrylamide of formula I.
- both X 1 and X 2 may each independently be selected as the same, or different -Y-O-Z groups.
- At least two of R 1 , X 1 or X 2 may be the same.
- At least X 1 and X 2 may be different groups.
- X 1 and X 2 may be covalently linked such as to form a cyclic structure.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I wherein R 1 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group; X 1 represents a C1-C10 alkyl group or a -Y-O-Z group wherein Y represents a Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group and Z represents a C1-C10 alkyl group; and X 2 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I wherein R 1 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group; X 1 represents a -Y-O-Z group wherein Y represents a C1-C4 alkylene bridging group and Z represents a C2-C7 alkyl group; and X 2 represents H.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I wherein R 1 represents H or methyl; X 1 represents a -Y- O-Z group wherein Y represents a methylene or ethylene bridging group and Z represents a Cs-Ce alkyl group; and X 2 represents H.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising n-butoxymethyl acrylamide (NBMA).
- NBMA n-butoxymethyl acrylamide
- the acrylic material may comprise at least 0.5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material, such as at least 1 wt%, such as at least 1.5 wt%, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%.
- the acrylic material may comprise at least 20 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material, such as at least 30 wt%, such as at least 40 wt%.
- the acrylic material may comprise at least 2 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material, such as more than 2 wt%.
- the further acrylic material may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 3 wt%, such as at least 4 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%.
- the further acrylic material may comprise at least 20 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 30 wt%, such as at least 40 wt%.
- the further acrylic material may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 10 wt%, such as at least 15 wt%, such as at least 25 wt%, or even at least 40 wt%.
- the further acrylic material may comprise at least 5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material, such as more than 5 wt%.
- the acrylic material and further acrylic material may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 10 wt%, such as at least 15 wt%, such as at least 25 wt%, or even at least 40 wt%.
- the acrylic material and further acrylic material may comprise at least 5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material, such as more than 5 wt%.
- the aqueous coating compositions described herein may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 10 wt%, such as at least 15 wt%.
- the aqueous coating compositions described herein comprising an acrylic material and further acrylic material wherein only one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I, the wt% ratio of the acrylamide containing acrylic material to the non-acrylamide containing acrylic material may be less than 1 .2:1 , such as less than 1 :1 , such as less than 0.8:1 , such as less than 0.5:1 .
- non-acrylamide containing material it is meant either the acrylic material or further acrylic material that is not formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method.
- the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises a solution polymerised acrylic material.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed by an emulsion polymerisation method.
- the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material.
- the acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method and the further acrylic material may be formed by an emulsion polymerisation method, suitably, the acrylic material may comprise a solution polymerised acrylic and the further acrylic material may comprise an emulsion polymerised acrylic.
- the acrylic material may be formed by emulsion polymerisation method and the further acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method, suitably, the acrylic material may comprise an emulsion polymerised acrylic and the further acrylic material may comprise a solution polymerised acrylic.
- the acrylic material and further acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method, suitably, the acrylic material and further acrylic material comprise a solution polymerised acrylic.
- the solution polymerisation method suitably comprises a plurality of components, which may be referred to as a solution polymerisation reaction mixture.
- the solution polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a solution polymerisation monomer component.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise the first, second or further monomer component.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise a monomer component as described above.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise an acrylic monomer as described above.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise an ethylenically unsaturated monomer as described above.
- the solution polymerisation reaction mixture may further comprise an initiator.
- the initiator may be a free radical initiator.
- Suitable initiators include, but are not limited to, tertiary butyl perbenzoate; tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate; tertiary butyl peroxy 2-ethyl hexanoate; di tertiary butyl peroxide; tertiary butyl peracetate; tertiary butyl peroctoate; azo type initiators such as, for example, 2,2’- azobis(isobutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2-methylbutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile) and 2,2'-Azobis(4-methoxy-2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile); persulfate initiators such as, for example, ammonium persulfate, sodium persulfate or
- the initiator may be soluble in the solution polymerisation reaction mixture.
- the initiator may be soluble in the monomer mixture.
- the initiator may comprise tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate, tertiary butyl peroctoate, di-tertiary amyl peroxide, or combinations thereof.
- the solution polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a solvent or mixture of solvents.
- suitable solvents will be well known to a person skilled in the art.
- suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, alcohols such as, for example, n-butanol, pentanol or hexanol; glycols such as, for example, butyl glycol; glycol ethers such as, for example, 2-butoxy ethanol, 1 -methoxy propan-2-ol or dipropylene glycol mono methyl ether; and combinations thereof.
- the solvent may comprise a mixture of solvents, such as n-butanol and butyl glycol. It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that the solvent or mixture of solvents may be chosen such that the monomer mixture is substantially soluble in said solvent or mixture of solvents.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component is caused to undergo polymerisation in the solvent or mixture of solvents to form the acrylic material or further acrylic material.
- the solution polymerisation of the solution polymerisation monomer component may be carried out as a free radical initiated solution polymerisation in a solvent or mixture of solvents.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out in a suitable reaction vessel.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component, initiator and/or solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel in any suitable order.
- the solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel before the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added to the reaction vessel.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component and initiator are added to the reaction vessel at the same time.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over any suitable period of time.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 0 to 12 hours, suitably 30 minutes to 8 hours, such as 1 hour to 6 hours, or even 2 hours to 4 hours.
- the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 3 hours.
- all of the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added at the same time (i.e. in one single addition).
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at any suitable temperature.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at an elevated temperature.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 80°C to 200°C, suitably from 100 to 180°C, such as from 120 to 160°C, or even from 130 to 150°C.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 135 to 140°C.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at reflux.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 80°C or above, such as 100°C or above, such as 120°C or above, such as 130°C or above, or even 135°C or above.
- Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 250°C or below, such as 200°C or below, such as 180°C or below, such as 160°C or lower, such as 150°C or lower, or even 145°C or lower.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by solution polymerisation may have any suitable number-average molecular weight (Mn).
- Mn was determined by gel permeation chromatography using a polystyrene standard according to ASTM D6579-11 (“Standard Practice for Molecular Weight Averages and Molecular Weight Distribution of Hydrocarbon, Rosin and Terpene Resins by Size Exclusion Chromatograph)/’. Rl detector, solvent: unstabilised THF, retention time marker: toluene, sample concentration: 10mg/ml).
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by solution polymerisation may have any suitable weight-average molecular weight (Mw).
- the Mw was determined by gel permeation chromatography using a polystyrene standard according to ASTM D6579-11 (“Standard Practice for Molecular Weight Averages and Molecular Weight Distribution of Hydrocarbon, Rosin and Terpene Resins by Size Exclusion Chromatography”. UV detector; 254nm, solvent: unstabilised THF, retention time marker: toluene, sample concentration: 2mg/ml).
- the emulsion polymerisation method suitably comprises a plurality of components, which may be referred to as an emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture.
- the emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise an emulsion polymerisation monomer component.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise the first, second or further monomer component.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise a monomer component as described above.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise an acrylic monomer as described above.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise an ethylenically unsaturated monomer as described above.
- the emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may further comprise an initiator.
- the initiator may be a free radical initiator.
- Suitable initiators include, but are not limited to, tertiary butyl perbenzoate; tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate; tertiary butyl peroxy 2-ethyl hexanoate; di tertiary butyl peroxide; tertiary butyl peracetate; tertiary butyl peroctoate; azo type initiators such as, for example, 2,2’- azobis(isobutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2-methylbutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile) and 2,2'-Azobis(4-methoxy-2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile); persulfate initiators such as, for example, ammonium persulfate, sodium persul
- the initiator may comprise tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate, tertiary butyl peroctoate, di-tertiary amyl peroxide, or combinations thereof.
- the emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a solvent or mixture of solvents. Suitable solvents will be well known to a person skilled in the art.
- the solvent used in emulsion polymerisation includes but are not limited to, water, a water soluble cosolvent and combinations thereof.
- solvents examples include, but are not limited to, water, methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, n-propanol, n-butanol, t-butanol, butyl cellulose, acetone, N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP), alkylene carbonates, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, methyl-ethyl ketone (MEK), 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol (CARBITOLTM), 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethanol (methyl CARBITOLTM), (2-(2-Butoxyethoxy)ethanol) (butyl CARBITOLTM), glycol ethers, dipropylene glycol ether (DowanolTM), ethyl acetates, glycol ether acetates, ethyl diacetates, propylene glycol, . It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that the solvent or mixture of solvents may be chosen such that the monomer mixture is substantially
- the emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a surfactant or a mixture of surfactants.
- Suitable surfactants will be well known to a person skilled in the art.
- Suitable surfactants may be anionic, non-ionic or cationic surfactants.
- the surfactant may comprise an anionic surfactant.
- suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, sodium lauryl sulfate, alpha-olefin sulfonate, nonyl phenol polyethers and salts and similar surfactants.
- Suitable surfactants may include reactive surfactants which contain a polymerizable moiety that can participate in the emulsion polymerisation reactions. Examples of suitable reactive surfactants include, but are not limited to, those disclosed in Polymeric Surfactants in Emulsion Polymerization, Vol. 35/36, pp. 467-475 (1990), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component is caused to undergo polymerisation in the solvent or mixture of solvents to form the acrylic material or further acrylic material.
- the emulsion polymerisation of the emulsion polymerisation monomer component may be carried out as a free radical initiated emulsion polymerisation in a solvent or mixture of solvents.
- Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out in a suitable reaction vessel.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component, initiator and/or solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel in any suitable order.
- the solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel before the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added to the reaction vessel.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and initiator may be added to the reaction vessel at the same time.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over any suitable period of time.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 0 to 12 hours, suitably 30 minutes to 8 hours, such as 1 hour to 6 hours, or even 2 hours to 4 hours.
- the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 3 hours.
- all of the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added at the same time (i.e. in one single addition).
- Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at any suitable temperature. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at an elevated temperature. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 80°C to 200°C, suitably from 100 to 180°C, such as from 120 to 160°C, or even from 130 to 150°C. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 135 to 140°C. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at reflux. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 80°C or above, such as 100°C or above, such as 120°C or above, such as 130°C or above, or even 135°C or above. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 250°C or below, such as 200°C or below, such as 180°C or below, such as 160°C or lower, such as 150°C or lower, or even 145°C or lower.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by emulsion polymerisation may have any suitable number-average molecular weight (Mn).
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by emulsion polymerisation may have any suitable weight-average molecular weight (Mw).
- the acrylic material may have any suitable acid value (AV) expressed on solids.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solids of at least 20 mg KOH/g, such as at least 30 mg KOH/g, such as at least 40 mg KOH/g, such as at least 50 mg KOH/g.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solids of from 0 to 400 mg KOH/g, such as from 5 to 350 mg KOH/g, such as from 10 to 250 mg KOH/g, such as from 20 to 200 mg KOH/g, such as from 30 to 150 mg KOH/g, such as from 40 to 100 mg KOH/g, or even from 50 to 80 mg KOH/g.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have any suitable acid value (AV) expressed on solution.
- the solution may be a 50 wt% solution in a solvent.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solution of at least 5 mg KOH/g, such as at least 10 mg KOH/g, such as at least 15 mg KOH/g, such as at least 20 mg KOH/g, such as at least 25 mg KOH/g.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solution of from 0 to 200 mg KOH/g, such as from 2.5 to 175 mg KOH/g, such as from 5 to 125 mg KOH/g, such as from 10 to 100 mg KOH/g, such as from 15 to 75 mg KOH/g, such as from 20 to 50 mg KOH/g, or even from 25 to 40 mg KOH/g .
- AV acid value expressed on solids was determined by titration with 0.1 M methanolic potassium hydroxide (KOH) solution.
- KOH methanolic potassium hydroxide
- a sample of solid polymer (0.1 to 3g depending on acid number) was weighed accurately into a conical flask and is dissolved, using light heating and stirring as appropriate, in 25ml of dimethyl formamide containing phenolphthalein indicator. The solution was then cooled to room temperature and titrated with the 0.1 M methanolic potassium hydroxide solution.
- the resulting acid number is expressed in units of mg KOH/g and is calculated using the following equation:
- Acid value titre of KOH solution (ml) x molarity KOH solution (M) x 56.1 weight of solid sample (g)
- the acrylic material may have any suitable glass transition temperature (Tg).
- Tg glass transition temperature
- the acrylic material may have a Tg from -20 to 150°C, such as from 0 to 120°C, such as from 20 to 100°C, or even from 50 to 80°C.
- Tg was measured according to ASTM D6604-00(2013) (“Standard Practice for Glass Transition Temperatures of Hydrocarbon Resins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry”. Heat-flux differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), sample pans: aluminium, reference: blank, calibration: indium and mercury, sample weight: 10mg, heating rate: 20°C/min).
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may be formed a monomer component comprising an epoxy containing monomer, such as an epoxy containing acrylic monomer, such as, for example, glycidyl methacrylate. Therefore, for example, one or both of the first monomer component and the second monomer component may comprise an epoxy containing monomer, such as an epoxy containing acrylic monomer, such as, for example, glycidyl methacrylate. Therefore, the acrylic material may comprise epoxy groups. In such a scenario, the epoxy group on the acrylic material may be reacted. For example, the epoxy group on the acrylic material may be chemically reacted, such as by reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material, which may thereby remove the epoxy functionality of the acrylic. In this manner, an epoxy reacted material may be formed.
- an epoxy containing monomer such as an epoxy containing acrylic monomer, such as, for example, glycidyl methacrylate. Therefore, the acrylic material may comprise epoxy groups.
- the acrylic material may comprise any suitable amount of an epoxy containing monomer.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise from 10 to 90 wt%, such as from 30 to 80 wt%, such as from 50 to 75 wt%, such as from 55 to 70 wt% epoxy containing monomer based on the total weight of the monomers of the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material).
- the epoxy reactive material comprises any material that reacts with the epoxy group to thereby remove the epoxy functionality. Suitable examples of epoxy reactive materials will be well known to a person skilled in the art.
- the epoxy reactive material may comprise, for example, an acid material, such as an organic acid material.
- the epoxy reactive material may comprise phosphoric acid, phenyl phosphinic acid, benzoic acid, acetic acid, and/or itaconic acid.
- the acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an epoxy containing monomer.
- the epoxy group on the acrylic material may be reacted.
- the epoxy groups on the acrylic material may be reacted by reacting the epoxy group with an organic acid, such as benzoic acid. In this manner, an epoxy reacted acrylic material may be formed.
- the epoxy group of the acrylic material may be reacted prior to contacting the acrylic material with the second monomer component.
- the epoxy group of the acrylic material may be reacted prior to contacting the acrylic material with the second monomer component such that all epoxy functionality of the acrylic material is removed prior to contacting the acrylic material with the second monomer component.
- an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprises an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, which further material is optionally covalently linked to the epoxy reacted acrylic material; wherein at least one of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer;
- the acrylic material comprises an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, which further acrylic material is not covalently linked to the epoxy reacted acrylic material; wherein the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprising an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material; wherein at least one of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water; wherein the
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form a acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprises an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material; wherein the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acryl
- R 1 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
- the first monomer component may comprise any suitable amount of an epoxy containing monomer.
- the first monomer component may comprise from 10 to 90 wt%, such as from 30 to 80 wt%, such as from 50 to 75 wt%, such as from 55 to 70 wt% epoxy containing monomer based on the total weight of the first monomer component.
- the epoxy reactive material may be added to the acrylic material in any suitable amount.
- the epoxy reactive material may be added in an amount suitable to react with all of the epoxy groups on the acrylic material.
- the epoxy reactive material may be added in an amount in excess of the epoxy material, in terms of the equivalents of epoxy to reactive group on the epoxy reactive group.
- the epoxy reactive material may be added in an amount suitable to react with all of the epoxy groups on the acrylic material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material that is not epoxy functional. In other words, all of the epoxy functionality has been reacted.
- the second monomer component may comprise methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid.
- the second monomer component may comprise any suitable amount of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid.
- the second monomer component may comprise from 10 to 99 wt% of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in the second acrylic material.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be obtainable by the following pictorially represented approach (labelled Approach 1).
- At least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material contains an acrylamide monomer of formula I. At least one of the acrylic monomers that form the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be ionic. At least one of the acrylic monomers that form the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be non-ionic.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be obtainable by the following pictorially represented approach (labelled Approach 2).
- Approach 2 the schematic experimental scheme labelled Approach 2 is representative only of the process and should not be restricted to the individual monomers, epoxy reactive material, or any other materials shown thereon. However, its inclusion is useful in generally highlighting how an epoxy functional acrylic material may be formed, then reacted with an epoxy reactive material (in this case, an organic acid) to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material.
- the further acrylic material (which is acid functional in Approach 2) is then polymerised in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material to lead to a mixture of the two polymers.
- the materials are then neutralized and dispersed in water to create an aqueous dispersion of the two acrylic materials. At least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material contains an acrylamide monomer of formula I (not shown).
- the first and/or second monomer component may comprise methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid.
- the first and/or second monomer component, such as the first or second monomer component may comprise any suitable amount of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid.
- the first and/or second monomer component, such as the first or second monomer component may comprise from 10 to 99 wt%, such as from 15 to 99 wt%, such as from 30 to 95 wt%, such as from 50 to 95 wt% methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in that monomer component.
- the first and/or second monomer component such as the first or second monomer component may comprise from 75 to 95 wt%, such as from 80 to 95 wt%, such as from 85 to 95 wt% methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in that monomer component.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise a monomer that comprises a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
- the monomer component, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise a monomer that comprises a phosphonic acid- and/or a sulfonic acid-functional group, or precursor thereof.
- the monomer component, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise a monomer that comprises a phosphonic acid-functional group, or precursor thereof.
- the monomer component of the further acrylic material/the second monomer component may comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
- the monomer component of the further acrylic material/the second monomer component may comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, and further comprise an acrylamide monomer of formula I.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material may not comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
- the first monomer component may not comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
- the monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof may comprise a vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
- the monomer may comprise vinylsulfonic acid, a vi nylsu If ate, vinylphosphonic acid and/or a vinylphosphate.
- the monomer may comprise vinylphosphonic acid.
- the monomer may comprise a styrene and/or ally monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, for example styrene phosphonic acid and/or allyl phosphonic acid.
- the monomer may comprise an acrylic monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, for example acrylic phosphate and/or 2-sulfoethylmethacryloate.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component, may comprise from >0.1 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as >0.3wt% or >0.4 wt%.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise ⁇ 90% of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid- , a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as ⁇ 60 wt% or ⁇ 40 wt%.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise from 0.1 to 90 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as from 0.3 to 60 wt% or from 0.5 to 40 wt%.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise ⁇ 20% of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid- , a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as ⁇ 15 wt% or ⁇ 10 wt% or ⁇ 9 wt%.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise from 0.1 to 20 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as from 0.3 to 15 wt% or from 0.3 to 10 wt% or from 0.4 to 9 wt%.
- the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material), such as an acrylic material formed from a monomer component comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, may have an Mn from 2,500 to 25,000 Da, such as from 4,000 to 15,000 Da.
- the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material such as the first and/or second monomer component comprises a monomer that comprises a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof
- the monomer component may be polymerised in the presence of a solvent or in a mixture of solvents that comprises a primary organic solvent, such as butanol.
- the acrylic material and the further acrylic material may be present in the aqueous coating composition in a weight ratio of from 1 :100 to 100:1 , such as from 1 :50 to 50:1 , such as from 20:1 to 1 :20, such as from 1 :10 to 10:1.
- the acrylic material may be present in excess of the further acrylic material in the aqueous coating composition, such as in a ratio of from greater than 1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 15:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 10:1.
- the acrylic material and the further acrylic material may be present in the aqueous coating composition in a weight ratio of from 1.1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from 1.1 :1 to 10:1 , such as from 2:1 to 8:1 , such as from 3:1 to 7:1 , such as from 3:1 to 5:1.
- the further acrylic material may be present in excess of the acrylic material in the aqueous coating composition, such as in a ratio of from greater than 1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 15:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 10:1.
- the further acrylic material and the acrylic material may be present in the aqueous coating composition in a weight ratio of from 1.1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from 1.1 :1 to 10:1 , such as from 2:1 to 8:1 , such as from 3:1 to 7:1 , such as from 3:1 to 5:1.
- the non-acid functional acrylic material may be present in excess of the acid functional acrylic material such as in a ratio of from greater than 1 :1 to 50:1 , such as from greater than 2:1 to 20:1 , such as from greater than 5:1 to 15:1.
- the covalent linkage between the two or more acrylic materials can be measured and confirmed by many different techniques well known to a person skilled in the art. For example, this can be confirmed by infra-red spectroscopy, GPC, gas chromatography etc. A person skilled in the art will be aware of the appropriate technique to use, depending on the functionality of the solution acrylics in question.
- Tetrahydrofuran THF was used as the eluent at a flow rate of 1 ml min 1 , and three PL Gel Mixed C columns were used for separation.
- a Mark-Houwink-Sakurada plot of the materials before and after mixing was generated from the results and the slope and gradient of the plot reviewed the determine if covalent linkage had occurred.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise any suitable amount of acrylic material.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 10 to 99 wt%, such as from 30 to 99 wt%, such as from 50 to 99 wt%, such as from 70 to 95 wt%, such as from 75 to 95 wt%, such as from 80 to 95 wt% of acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise at least 10 wt%, suitably at least 25 wt%, such as at least 40 wt%, or even at least 50 wt% of acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise up to 99.9 wt%, suitably up to 99 wt%, such as up to 97 wt%, such as up to 95 wt%, such as up to 92 wt%, or even up to 90 wt% of acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the coating compositions comprise a neutraliser.
- Suitable neutralisers will be well known to a person skilled in the art.
- suitable neutralisers include, but are not limited to tertiary amines such as, for example, dimethylethanolamine (DMEA), trimethyl amine, methyl diethanol amine, ethyl methyl ethanol amine, dimethyl ethyl amine, dimethyl propyl amine, dimethyl 3-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, dimeythylbenzyl amine, dimethyl 2-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, diethyl methyl amine, dimethyl 1-hydroxy- 2-propyl amine, triethyl amine, tributyl amine, N-methyl morpholine; ammonia; hydrazine; metallic aluminium; metallic zinc; water-soluble oxides of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll); water- soluble hydroxides of the elements Li, Na, K, M
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise any suitable amount of neutraliser.
- the amount of neutraliser may be a suitable amount to neutralise the acid functionality such that the acrylic material disperses in water.
- the amount of neutraliser may be a suitable amount to neutralise at least 10%, suitably at least 20%, such as at least 30%, such as at least 40%, or even at least 50% of the acid functionality of the acrylic material.
- ‘neutralise at least 20%’ is meant that at least 20% of the available acid groups of the acrylic material are neutralised.
- at least 30%, at least 40%, at least 50% neutralised etc. means that at least 30%, at least 40%, at least 50% of the available acid groups of the acrylic material are neutralised.
- the acid functionality of the acrylic material may be 50% neutralised with the neutraliser.
- the neutraliser For example, at least 0.1 , at least 0.2, at least 0.3, such as at least 0.4, or even at least 0.5 equivalents of neutraliser may be added to the acrylic material per equivalent of acid groups.
- the aqueous coating composition may further comprise a crosslinker material.
- the crosslinker material may be operable to crosslink the acid and/or hydroxyl functionality of the acrylic material. Suitable crosslinker materials will be well known to the person skilled in the art. It will be understood by a person skilled in the art that the aqueous coating composition may be provided as a single component coating composition or a multiple component coating composition. In the case of a multiple component coating composition, the crosslinker material may be provided in a different component to the acrylic material, for example.
- Suitable crosslinker materials include the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer; and an alcohol, amine and/or thiol, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine and/or thiol; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g.
- Non-limiting examples include wherein the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride includes maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, methyltetrahydrophthalic anhydride, vinylhexahydrophthalic anhydride, chlorendic anhydride, methylendomethylenetetrahydrophthalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, alkenyl succinic anhydrides, such as maleic anhydride.
- Suitable crosslinker materials include the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising >70% by weight of a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof by total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed; optionally, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer; and optionally, an alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water , wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivate thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, when present; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g.
- Non-limiting examples include wherein the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride includes maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, methyltetrahydrophthalic anhydride, vinylhexahydrophthalic anhydride, chlorendic anhydride, methyl-endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, alkenyl succinic anhydrides.
- the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may comprise maleic anhydride.
- Suitable crosslinker materials include, but are not limited to, maleic acids such as poly(maleic acid); anhydrides such as trimellitic anhydride and its derivatives.
- a trimellitic anhydride derivative crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of trimellitic anhydride with a hydroxyl-functional hydrocarbon compound, such as the reaction product of trimellitic anhydride with ethane-1 ,2-diol and/or glycerol.
- Suitable examples of commercially available trimellitic anhydride derivatives include, but are not limited to, those sold under the trade name ARADUR (RTM) 3380-1 commercially available from Huntsman.
- Suitable crosslinker materials include, but are not limited to, the following: phenolic resins (or phenol-formaldehyde resins); aminoplast resins (or triazine-formaldehyde resins); amino resins; epoxy resins; epoxy-mimic resins, such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (BPA) replacements; isocyanate resins, isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate; hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins; carbodiimide resins; oxazolines; and combinations thereof.
- phenolic resins or phenol-formaldehyde resins
- aminoplast resins or triazine-formaldehyde resins
- amino resins epoxy resins
- epoxy-mimic resins such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (B
- Non-limiting examples of phenolic resins are those formed from the reaction of a phenol with an aldehyde or a ketone, suitably from the reaction of a phenol with an aldehyde, such as from the reaction of a phenol with formaldehyde or acetaldehyde, or even from the reaction of a phenol with formaldehyde.
- Non-limiting examples of phenols which may be used to form phenolic resins are phenol, butyl phenol, xylenol and cresol.
- phenolic resins are of the resol type.
- resol type we mean resins formed in the presence of a basic (alkaline) catalyst and optionally an excess of formaldehyde.
- Suitable examples of commercially available phenolic resins include, but are not limited to those sold under the trade name PHENODUR (RTM) commercially available from Cytec Industries, such as PHENODUR EK-827, PHENODUR VPR1785, PHENODUR PR 515, PHENODUR PR516, PHENODUR PR 517, PHENODUR PR 285, PHENODUR PR612 or PHENODUR PH2024; resins sold under the trade name BAKELITE (RTM) commercially available from Momentive, such as BAKELITE 6582 LB, BAKELITE 6535, BAKELITE PF9989 or BAKELITE PF6581 ; SFC 112 commercially available from Schenectady; DUREZ (RTM) 33356 commercially available from SHHPP; ARALINK (RTM) 40-852 commercially available from Bitrez; or combinations thereof.
- PHENODUR RTM
- Cytec Industries such as PHENODUR EK-827, PHENODUR VPR1785, P
- the crosslinker material may be selected from phenolic resins; hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins; carbodiimide resins, such as polycarbodiimide resins; oxazolines; isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate; oxazolines; epoxy-mimic resins, such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (BPA) replacements; or combinations thereof.
- phenolic resins hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins
- carbodiimide resins such as polycarbodiimide resins
- oxazolines isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate
- epoxy-mimic resins such as those based on bis
- the crosslinker material may be selected from hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; phenolic resins, hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins; carbodiimide resins, such as polycarbodiimide resins; oxazolines; isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate; oxazolines; epoxy-mimic resins, such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (BPA) replacements; or combinations thereof.
- hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins
- carbodiimide resins such as polycarbodiimide resins
- oxazolines such as isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate
- oxazolines epoxy-mimic resins
- the crosslinker material may comprise a phenolic resin, such as a resole phenolic resin.
- the crosslinker material may be selected from phenolic resins, hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins, carbodiimide resins, oxazolines or combinations thereof.
- the crosslinker material may be selected from hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins, carbodiimide resins, oxazolines or combinations thereof.
- the crosslinker material may be selected from hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins and/or hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material and/or a hydroxyalkylurea material and/or a carbodiimide resin.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material and/or a hydroxyalkylurea material.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material and a phenolic resin, such as a hydroxyalkylamide material and a resole phenolic resin, such as a p-hydroxyalkylamide material and a resole phenolic resin.
- the crosslinker material may contain nitrogen, which may be in the form of an amine or amide material.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyl substituted amine or amide material.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material, such as a p- hydroxyalkylamide material.
- the crosslinker material may contain a terminal chemical group as shown in Formula I.
- the terminal chemical group of Formula I may be connected to a further chemical structure, not shown. Additionally or alternatively, the chemical group of Formula I may be suspended from a carrier substrate, such as a silica carrier substrate, for example.
- the hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may contain a plurality of terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula I.
- the hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may contain 2, 3 or 4 terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula I.
- the hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may comprise a moiety according to Formula II:
- Each of Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 and Y 4 with reference to Formula II may represent an ethylene group.
- X may represent a butylene group.
- the hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may comprise a material of formula III:
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise a commercially available hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker such as, for example, PRIMID XL-552 (available from EMS Chemie); PRIMID QM-1260 (available from EMS Chemie); PRIMID SF-4510 (available from EMS Chemie) and N,N,N’,N’-tetrakis(2- hydroxypropyl)adipamide.
- a commercially available hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker such as, for example, PRIMID XL-552 (available from EMS Chemie); PRIMID QM-1260 (available from EMS Chemie); PRIMID SF-4510 (available from EMS Chemie) and N,N,N’,N’-tetrakis(2- hydroxypropyl)adipamide.
- the hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may comprise a polyhydroxyalkylamide material having the formula (IV): formula (IV) wherein, with reference to formula (IV), Z represents a polymer or an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene or arylene group;
- Z’ represents a bivalent organic linking group
- m is 0 or 1 ;
- X represents a bivalent organic bridging group
- R represents a hydroxyalkylamide group
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent a polymer or an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene or arylene group.
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent a polymer.
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent any suitable polymer. Suitable polymers include, but are not limited to, acrylic polymers, polyester polymers, polyester amide polymers, polyurethane polymers, epoxy polymers, and combinations thereof.
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer, a polyester polymer or a combination thereof.
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer grafted to a polyester or a polyester grafted to an acrylic polymer.
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer.
- Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer derived from monomers having ethylenic unsaturation.
- the crosslinker material may be in the form of a urea material.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyl substituted urea material.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxy functional alkyl polyurea material.
- the crosslinker material may contain a terminal chemical group as shown in Formula XVII.
- Formula XVII wherein Y 5 and Y 6 each, independently, represent hydrogen, an alkyl or a hydroxy functional alkyl having two or more carbon atoms and at least one of Y 5 and Y 6 is a hydroxyl functional alkyl having two or more carbon atoms.
- the Y 5 and Y 6 groups may exclude ether linkages.
- the terminal chemical group of Formula XVII may be connected to a further chemical structure, not shown. Additionally or alternatively, the chemical group of Formula XVII may be suspended from a carrier substrate, such as a silica carrier substrate, for example.
- the crosslinker material may contain a plurality of terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula IV.
- the crosslinker may contain 2 to 6 terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula XVII, such as 2, 3 or 4 terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula XVII.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a moiety according to Formula XVIII:
- Formula XVIII wherein R with reference to Formula XVIII comprises the residue of an isocyanurate, biuret, allophonate, glycoluril, benzoguanamine, polyetheramine, and/or polymeric moiety having an Mn of 500 or greater; each Ri with reference to Formula XVIII is independently a hydrogen, an alkyl or a hydroxy functional alkyl having 2 or more carbons; and n is 2-6.
- Ri group with reference to Formula XVIII may exclude ether linkages.
- the crosslinker may comprise a moiety according to Formula XIX:
- Rg with reference to Formula XIX comprises a substituted or unsubstituted Ci to Cae alkyl group, an aromatic group, or the residue of an isocyanurate, biuret, allophonate, glycoluril, benzoguanamine, polyetheramine, and/or a polymeric moiety having an Mn of 500 or greater;
- each Ri with reference to Formula VI is independently a hydrogen, an alkyl group having 1 or more carbons, or a hydroxy functional alkyl having 2 or more carbons and at least one Ri with reference to Formula VI is a hydroxy functional alkyl having 2 or more carbons; and n is 2-6.
- the acid functional polyester material may comprise COOH functionality that reacts with the polyurea to form an ester linkage.
- the Ri group with reference to Formula XIX may exclude ether linkages.
- R and Rg with reference to Formula XIX may comprise the residue of an isocyanurate, biuret, allophonate, glycoluril, benzoguanamine, polyetheramine and/or polymeric moiety having an Mn of 500 or greater.
- An isocyanurate will be understood as referring to a compound having three isocyanate groups, such as in ring form, and is sometimes referred to as a trimer. This can include compounds having an isocyanurate moietie.
- Formula XX wherein Ri with reference to Formula XX is as described above with regard to Formula XVIII; and each Rs independently comprises an alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alicyclic, and/or polyetheralkyl group.
- a biuret will be understood as referring to a compound that results upon the condensation of two molecules of urea, and is sometimes referred to as a carbamylurea.
- Biurets are commercial available from Vencore X Chemical and Covestro as, for example, DESMODUR N-75, DESMODUR N- 100, and DESMODUR N-3200, HDB 75B, HDB 75M, HDB 75MX, HDB-LV.
- Uretidione is a dimer of diisocyanate, examples of which include DESMODUR N-3400 polyisocyanate, a blend of the trimer and uretidione of HDI: wherein each R5 independently comprises an alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alicyclic, and/or polyetheralkyl group.
- an “allophonate” means a compound made from urethane and isocyanate.
- glycof means a compound composed of two cyclic urea groups joined across the same two-carbon chain, an example of which includes the below:
- polyether amine means a compound having an amine group attached to a polyether backbone such as one characterized by propylene oxide, ethylene oxide, or mixed propylene oxide and ethylene oxide repeating units in their respective structures, such as, for example, one of the Jeffamine series products.
- Certain hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas of, and/or used may be made by reacting an isocyanate-containing compound with amino alcohol. Any isocyanate-containing compound having at least two isocyanate groups can be used, such as any of those described above.
- the hydroxyl functional alkyl polyureas can be made by reacting amino alcohol with an isocyanate-containing compound in an organic polar solvent, such as alcohol or water.
- the equivalent ratio of amine to isocyanate may be from 2-1 :1 -2, such as 1 :1.
- hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas may be made by alternative methods as well.
- amino alcohols can react with carbonate to form hydroxylalkyl carbamate, and hydroxylalkyl carbamate can further react with amines to form hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas.
- the crosslinker material may be in the form of a carbodiimide resin.
- the crosslinker may comprise a polycarbodiimide.
- the crosslinker may comprise a polycarbodiimide having the following structural units (XXVI) or (XXVII) including mixtures thereof: where e is an integer of from 2 to 20; f and g are each at least 1 , and f+g is an integer up to 20; E is a radical selected from where R 2 with reference to structural units (XXVIII) or (XXIX) comprises a cyclic radical and R 3 with reference to (XXVIII) or (XXIX) is a linear hydrocarbon radical containing at least 4 carbon atoms and R 4 with reference to (XXIX) is hydrogen or an alkyl radical.
- the polycarbodiimides may be prepared by reacting an organic group containing a polyisocyanate in the presence of a suitable catalyst to form a polycarbodiimide having terminal NCO- functionality, wherein an active hydrogen-containing compound is added before, during or after polycarbodiimide formation.
- the polyisocyanate may be an aliphatic, including cycloaliphatic, or an aromatic polyisocyanate or mixture of the two.
- the aliphatic may comprise cycloaliphatic polyisocyanate and/or alkaryl polyisocyanate.
- the polyisocyanate may comprise from 2 to 4, such as 2 isocyanate groups per molecule. Examples of suitable higher polyisocyanates are 1 ,2,4-benzene triisocyanate and polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, or combinations thereof.
- suitable aromatic diisocyanates are 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 1 ,3-phenylene diisocyanate, 1 ,4-phenylene diisocyanate and tolylene diisocyanate or combinations thereof.
- suitable aliphatic diisocyanates are straight chain aliphatic diisocyanates, such as 1 ,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate and 1 ,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate; and alkaryl polyisocyanates, such as m-tetramethylxylene diisocyanate or combinations thereof. Cycloaliphatic diisocyanates may be employed.
- Examples include 1 ,4-cyclohexyl diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, alpha, alpha-xylylene diisocyanate and 4,4- methylene-bis(cyclohexyl isocyanate) or combinations thereof.
- Substituted organic group-containing polyisocyanates may be used in which the substituents comprise nitro, chloro, alkoxy and/or other groups that are not reactive with hydroxyl groups or active hydrogens and provided the substituents are not positioned to render the isocyanate group unreactive.
- the active hydrogen-containing compound used in the preparation of the polycarbodiimide may be a chain extender or spacer linking polyisocyanates together to form NCO-adducts or to link NCO- functional polycarbodiimides together.
- Any suitable organic compound containing active hydrogens may be used.
- active hydrogen atoms means hydrogens which, because of their position in the molecule, display activity according to the Zerewitinoff test. Accordingly, active hydrogens include hydrogen atoms attached to oxygen or nitrogen, and thus useful compounds will include those having at least two of these groups (in any combination): -OH, and -NH 2
- the moieties attached to each group may be aliphatic, including cycloaliphatic, aromatic, or of a mixed type with aliphatic may be suitable.
- the active hydrogen-containing material may comprise from 2 to 4, such as 2 active hydrogens per molecule.
- Examples of such compounds include amines, which includes polyamines; aminoalcohols; mercapto-terminated derivatives; and alcohols, such as polyhydroxy materials (polyols) which may provide an easier reaction with a polyisocyanate, or combinations thereof.
- a polyol may give fewer side reactions, which may give higher yields of urethane product with lower by-product and/or the products may be hydrolytically stable.
- polyols there are a wide variety of materials available which can be selected to give a wide spectrum of desired properties.
- a polyol may a have desirable reaction rate with polyisocyanates. Both saturated and unsaturated active hydrogen-containing compounds can be used, such as a saturated material, which may provide improved coating properties.
- the polyhydroxyl material or polyol may be a low or high molecular weight material and in general will have average hydroxyl values as determined by ASTM designation E-222-67, Method B, of 2000 and below, such as from 2000 and 10.
- polyol means materials having an average of two or more hydroxyl groups per molecule.
- the polyol may comprise a low molecular weight diol, triol, a higher molecular weight polyol, a low molecular weight amide-containing polyol and a higher polymeric polyol, or a combination thereof, such as a polyester polyol, polyether polyol, polycarbonate polyol and hydroxy-containing (meth)acrylic polymer or a combination thereof.
- the polymer may have a hydroxyl value of from 10 to 180.
- the polymers may have number average molecular weight of from 96 to 10,000 Da.
- Suitable low molecular weight diol, triol and higher alcohol will be known by a person skilled in the art. They may have a hydroxy value of 200 or above, such as within the range of from 200 to 2000. Such materials include aliphatic polyol, such as alkylene polyol containing from 4 to 18 carbon atoms. Examples include 1 ,4-butanediol and 1 ,6-hexanediol, or combinations thereof. The polyol may comprise an ether linkage such as diethylene glycol and tetraethylene glycol or combinations thereof.
- the condensation reaction may be conducted by taking the solution of the polyisocyanate and heating in the presence of suitable catalyst.
- catalyst include 1 -ethyl-3-phospholine, 1 -ethyl- 3-methyl-3-phospholine-1 -oxide, 1 -ethyl-3-methyl-3-phospholine-1 -sulfide, 1 -ethyl-3-methyl- phospholidine, 1 -ethyl-3-methyl-phospholidine-1 -oxide, 3-methyl-1 -phenyl-3-phospholine-1 -oxide and bicyclic terpene alkyl or hydrocarbyl aryl phosphine oxide or camphene phenyl phosphine oxide or combinations thereof.
- the amount of catalyst used will depend to a large extent on the reactivity of the catalyst itself and the polyisocyanate being used. A concentration range of from 0.05-5 parts of catalyst per 100 parts of adduct is generally suitable.
- the crosslinker material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of formaldehyde.
- substantially free we mean to refer to crosslinker material containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to crosslinker material containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to crosslinker material containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the crosslinker material may comprise 0 wt% of formaldehyde.
- the crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising:
- the crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising:
- the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be any suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride.
- the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be any suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride that is able to undergo polymerisation, for example, free radical polymerisation, optionally with an ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
- Suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides will be known to a person skilled in the art.
- Suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides include, but are not limited to, maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, methyltetrahydrophthalic anhydride, vinylhexahydrophthalic anhydride, chlorendic anhydride, methyl-endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, alkenyl succinic anhydrides such as, for example, allyl succinic anhydride and dodecenyl succinic anhydride, norbornene anhydride and combinations thereof.
- the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be maleic anhydride.
- Diacid derivative of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride refers to the diacid derivative of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides as defined herein that results from the hydrolysis of the anhydride group.
- a person skilled in the art will understand that the cyclic anhydride group will become non-cyclic upon hydrolysis.
- Suitable diacid derivatives of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides include, but are not limited to, maleic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, vinylhexahydrophthalic acid, endomethylenetetra-hydrophthalic acid, chlorendic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, alkenyl succinic acids such as, for example, allyl succinic acid and dodecenyl succinic acid, norbornene acid and combinations thereof.
- the diacid derivative of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be maleic acid.
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise an acrylic monomer.
- Suitable acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, alkyl (alk)acrylate, such as Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate, for example, Ci to Ge alkyl (meth)acrylate, and (alk)acrylic acid, such as (Ci to Ge alk)acrylic acid.
- the acrylic monomers may comprise a functional group, such as an epoxy group.
- the acrylic monomers may comprise glycidyl methacrylate.
- acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate; methyl methacrylate; ethyl acrylate; ethyl methacrylate; propyl acrylate; propyl methacrylate; isopropyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, butyl acrylate; butyl methacrylate, pentyl acrylate, pentyl methacrylate, isoamyl acrylate, isoamyl methacrylate, hexyl acrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, decyl acrylate decyl methacrylate, isodecyl acrylate, isodecyl methacrylate, lauryl acrylate, lauryl methacrylate, octyl acrylate, octyl acrylate, o
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise a hydroxyl functional monomer, such as a hydroxyl functional acrylic monomer.
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise a hydroxyl functional alkyl(alk)acrylate, for example, hydroxyl functional Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate, such as hydroxyl functional Ci to Ge alkyl (meth)acrylate or hydroxyl functional Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate.
- Suitable hydroxyl functional acrylic monomer(s) include, but are not limited to, hydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxymethyl acrylate, hydroxymethyl methacrylate, hydroxypropyl acrylate, hydroxypropyl methacrylate, hydroxybutyl acrylate, hydroxybutyl methacrylate, hydroxypentyl acrylate, hydroxypentyl acrylate, hydroxyhexyl methacrylate, hydroxyhexyl methacrylate, methyl 2-(hydroxymethyl)acrylate and/or ethyl 2-(hydroxymethyl)acrylate.
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise hydroxyethyl acrylate and/or hydroxyethyl methacrylate, such as hydroxyethyl acrylate.
- the hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, 2-hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, 2-(2-hydroxyethyl) ethyl vinyl ether, and/or hydroxystyrene.
- the hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise the reaction product of (meth)acrylic acid with an epoxy (such as Cardura E10) and/or the reaction product of glycidyl methacrylate with a carboxylic acid functional component (such as a benzoic acid, aliphatic acid).
- an epoxy such as Cardura E10
- a carboxylic acid functional component such as a benzoic acid, aliphatic acid
- the crosslinker material may comprise >2.5% hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed, such as >5 wt%, or >7 wt%, or >10 wt%.
- the crosslinker material may comprise ⁇ 50% hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed, such as ⁇ 40 wt%, or ⁇ 30 wt%, or ⁇ 20 wt%.
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise a vinyl ether monomer.
- suitable vinyl ether monomers include, but are not limited to, methyl vinyl ether, ethyl vinyl ether, n- propyl vinyl ether, isopropyl vinyl ether, n-butyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether, t-butyl vinyl ether, pentyl vinyl ether, cyclopentyl vinyl ether, hexyl vinyl ether, cyclohexyl vinyl ether, 2-ethylhexyl vinyl ether, 2- hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, 1 ,4-butanediol divinyl ether, diethyleneglycol divinyl ether, triethyleneglycol divinyl ether, 1 ,4-cyclohexanedimethanol divinyl ether, 2-(2-hydroxyethyl) ethyl vinyl ether,
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise an additional ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
- suitable additional ethylenically unsaturated monomers include, but are not limited to, aryl substituted ethylenically unsaturated monomers such as, for example, styrene, a- methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, chloromethylstyrene, 4-hydroxystyrene, diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,4- diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,5-diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,6-diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,3,4- triglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,3,5-triglycidyl oxime styrene, 2,3,6-triglycidyloxymethylstyrene and 3,4,5- triglycidyloxymethylstyrene
- the additional ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise monomers, oligomers and/or polymers of the aforementioned monomers.
- butadiene may be in the form of a monomer or may be in the form of polybutadiene.
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, a vinyl ether monomer, vinyl acetate or combinations thereof.
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether, vinyl acetate or combinations thereof.
- the unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may comprise maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether, vinyl acetate or combinations thereof.
- the unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may comprise maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether, vinyl acetate and/or a hydroxyl functional monomer (such as hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate).
- the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise isobutyl vinyl ether.
- the unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may comprise maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise isobutyl vinyl ether.
- the crosslinker material may comprise at least 75 wt% of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, such as maleic anhydride and/or maleic acid, such as at least 80 wt%, such as at least 85 wt%, such as at least 90 wt%, such as at least 95 wt% or at least 97 wt% or at least 98 wt% or at least 99 wt% or >99 wt%, or at least 99.1 wt%, or at least 99.5 wt% or at least 99.9wt% or 100wt% cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
- the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed is meant the total solid weight of (i) a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, (ii) an ethylenically unsaturated monomer, when present, and any additional monomer(s) present and does not include (ill) an alcohol, amine and/or thiol, when present.
- the crosslinker material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of styrene.
- substantially free in relation to styrene is meant that the crosslinker material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
- essentially free in relation to styrene is meant that the crosslinker material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
- the crosslinker material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.01 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
- the crosslinker material may be formed from monomers which comprise no, i.e. 0 wt%, styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
- the crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising (iii) an alcohol, amine thiol and/or water, such as with alcohol, amine and/or thiol.
- the alcohol may be any suitable alcohol. Suitable alcohols will be known to a person skilled in the art.
- the alcohol may be an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic C1-C20 alkanol, an aryl alcohol or combinations thereof.
- the alcohol may be a monohydric alcohol or a polyol, such as a diol, triol, tetraol etc., for example.
- the alcohol may be methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, butoxy ethanol, methoxy propanol or combinations thereof.
- the alcohol may be an aryl alcohol. Examples of suitable aryl alcohols include, but are not limited to, phenol, benzyl alcohol, phenethyl alcohol, phenylpropyl alcohol, phenoxy ethanol, phenyl carbinol, methylphenyl carbinol, cresol, hydroxyalkylated bisphenols and combinations thereof.
- the amine may be any suitable amine. Suitable amines will be known to a person skilled in the art.
- the amine may be an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic C1-C20 amine, such as a C1-C10 amine, such as a C1-6 amine, such as a C1-C4 amine, such as a C1-C3 amine, such as a C1-C2 amine, or even ethylamine.
- the amine may be an aryl amine.
- the amine may be a polyamine such as, for example, a diamine, triamine etc.
- Suitable amines include, but are not limited to, methylamine, ethylamine, propylamine, isopropylamine, butylamine, isobutylamine, t-butylamine, benzylamine, polyetheramines such as, for example, those sold under the trade name JEFFAMINE (commercially available from Huntsman Corporation) or combinations thereof.
- the thiol may be any suitable thiol. Suitable thiols will be known to a person skilled in the art. Examples of suitable thiols include, but are not limited to, methanethiol, ethanethiol, 1 -propanethiol, 2- propanethiol, 1 -butanethiol, 2-butanethiol, beta-mercaptopropionic acids and/or esters, thiolglycolic acids and/or esters, thiophenol and combinations thereof.
- the thiol may be a monothiol or a polythiol, such as a dithiol, trithiol, tetrathiol etc., for example.
- the alcohol, amine and/or thiol may have further functionality.
- the alcohol may also have amine, acid, thiol, cyclic carbonate, hydroxy, epoxy or oxazoline functionality.
- the amine may also have alcohol, acid, thiol, cyclic carbonate, hydroxy, epoxy or oxazoline functionality.
- the thiol may also have amine, alcohol, acid, cyclic carbonate, hydroxy, epoxy or oxazoline functionality. It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that, for example, an alcohol also having amine functionality may be the same as an amine also having alcohol functionality.
- suitable alcohols, amines and/or thiols also having further functionality include, but are not limited to alkanolamines such as, for example, methanolamine, ethanolamine, methyl ethanolamine, ethyl ethanolamine, N-methyl ethanolamine, N-ethyl ethanolamine, 1 -amino-2-propanol, 3-amino-1 -propanol, 4-amino-1 -butanol, 1 -amino-2-butanol, 1-amino-3-butanol, dimethanolamine; diethanolamine, dipropanolamine, diisopropanolamine and methyl diethanolamine, hydroxyl and/or alkoxy-substituted oxazolines such as, for example, 2-propyl-4-methyoxy oxazoline, glycerol carbonate, glycidol, mercaptoethanol, glycolic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, thio
- the amine and/or thiol may be a hydroxy functional amine and/or thiol.
- the hydroxy functional amine and/or thiol may comprise a hydroxyl group.
- the hydroxy functional amine may be an alkanolamine for example an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic C1-C20 alkanolamine, such as a C1-C10 alkanolamine, such as a Ci-Ce alkanolamine, such as a C1-C4 alkanolamine, such as a C1-C3 alkanolamine, such as a C1-C2 alkanolamine, or even ethanolamine.
- the hydroxyl functional amine may be an alkanolamine comprising two or more hydroxyl groups.
- the hydroxy functional amine may be a dialkanolamine or a trialkanolamine,
- Each alkanol group may independently comprise C1-C20 alkanol, such as C1-C10 alkanol, or C1-6 alkanol, or C1-C3 alkanol, such as dimethanolamine; diethanolamine, dipropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, such as diisopropanolamine.
- the alcohol may comprise at least two hydroxyl groups.
- the crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of the reaction mixture comprising (iii) an alcohol, amine and/or thiol wherein the amine and/or thiol comprises a hydroxy group and the alcohol comprises at least two hydroxy groups.
- the crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture wherein >10%, such as >25 mol%, such as >40 mol%, such as >50 mol% of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an amine and/or thiol comprising a hydroxy group, and/or an alcohol comprising two or more hydroxy groups.
- crosslinker material can be dual-curing due to the further functionality that remains available for crosslinking, such that the crosslinker material may react with a suitable functional group of the binder and/or the suitable functional group of the crosslinker material.
- At least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may be reacted with the alcohol, amine thiol and/or water, such as with alcohol, amine and/or thiol, when present. It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that reacting a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol results in the esterification, amidation and/or thioesterification of one or each of the acid groups of said cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof.
- the monoester derivative When a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol the monoester derivative may be formed. However, alternatively, the diester derivative is formed.
- monoester derivative and like terms as used herein, is meant that one of the acid groups of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol (to form an ester, amide and/or thioester group).
- diester derivative and like terms as used herein, is meant that both of the acid groups of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol (to form an ester, amide and/or thioester group).
- the reaction product may be obtained by reacting said alcohol, amine and/or thiol with the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride under conditions which can effect the ring-opening reaction of the acid anhydride but which do not substantially cause a polyesterification, polyamidation and/or thioesterification reaction and/or formation of the diester, diamide and/or dithioester derivative.
- the crosslinker material may have an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g.
- the crosslinker material may have an acid number of at least 200 mg KOH/g, such as at least 300 mg KOH/g, such as at least 400 mg KOH/g, such as at least 500 mg KOH/g, or even at least 600 mg KOH/g.
- the crosslinker material may have an acid number up to 1 ,000 mg KOH/g, such as up to 975 mg KOH/g, such as up to 950 mg KOH/g, such as up to 925 mg KOH/g, or even up to 900 mg KOH/g.
- the crosslinker material may have an acid number from 100 to 1 ,000 mg KOH/g, such as from 200 to 975 mg KOH/g, such as from 300 to 950 mg KOH/g, such as from 400 to 925 mg KOH/g or even from 500 to 900 mg KOH/g or from 600 to 900 mg KOH/g.
- the acid groups of the crosslinker material may be at least partially neutralised by contacting said crosslinker material with a neutraliser.
- the crosslinker material may comprise a neutraliser. Suitable neutralisers will be known to a person skilled in the art.
- Suitable neutralisers include, but are not limited to, tertiary amines such as, for example, dimethylethanolamine (DMEA), trimethyl amine, N-methyl diethanol amine, N-ethyl N-methyl ethanol amine, N,N-dimethyl ethyl amine, N,N-dimethyl propyl amine, N,N-dimethyl 3-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, N,N-dimeythylbenzyl amine, N,N- dimethyl 2-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, N,N-diethyl methyl amine, N,N-dimethyl 1 -hydroxy-2-propyl amine, triethyl amine, tributyl amine, N,N-dimethyl dodecylamine, N-methyl morpholine; ammonia; hydrazine; metallic aluminium; metallic zinc; water-soluble oxides of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and S
- the crosslinker material may have a hydroxyl value of >2 mg KOH/g, such as of >5 mg KOH/g, or of >10 mg KOH/g.
- the crosslinker material may have a hydroxyl value of ⁇ 230 mg KOH/g, such as ⁇ 180mg KOH/g, or ⁇ 140 mg KOH/g.
- the crosslinker material may have a hydroxyl value from 2 to 230 mg KOH/g, such as from 5 to 180 mg KOH/g, such as from 10 to 140 mg KOH/g.
- the crosslinker material may have any suitable glass transition temperature (Tg).
- Tg glass transition temperature
- the crosslinker material may have a Tg of at least 0°C, such as at least 20°C, such as at least 30°C, such as at least 40°C, such as at least 50°C, such as at least 60°C, such as at least 70°C, such as at least 80°C, such as at least 90°C, or even at least 100°C.
- the crosslinker material may have a Tg of up to 300°C, such as up to 250°C, such as up to 225°C.
- the crosslinker material may have any suitable number average molecular weight (Mn).
- Mn number average molecular weight
- the crosslinker material may have an Mn of up to 5,000 Da, such as up to 3,000 Da or up to 2,000 Da.
- the crosslinker material may have an Mn of from 300 to 5,000 Da, such as from 400 to 3,000 Da, such as from 500 to 2,000 Da.
- the crosslinker material may have an Mw of up to 8,000 Da, such as up to 5,000 Da, or up to 4,000 Da.
- the crosslinker material may have an Mw from 450 to 8,000 Da such as from 600 to 5,000 Da, such as from 800 to 4,000 Da.
- the coating composition may comprise any suitable amount of the crosslinker material reaction product.
- the coating composition may comprise at least 2wt%, or at least 3wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 8 wt% of the crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the coating composition.
- the coating composition may comprise up to 90 wt%, such as up to 80 wt%, such as up to 70 wt%, such as up to 60 wt%, such as up to 50 wt%, such as up to 40 wt%, such as up to 30 wt%, or even 25 wt% of the crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the coating composition.
- crosslinker materials are provided in US application 16/832,108 and PCT/US2021/024078, the contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise any suitable amount of crosslinker material operable to crosslink acid and/or hydroxyl functionality on the acrylic material.
- the crosslinker material may be present in an amount of less than 40 wt% of the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 35 wt%, such as less than 30 wt%, such as less than 25 wt%, such as less than 15 wt%, such as less than 12 wt%, such as less than 10 wt%.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 40 wt%, such as from 1 to 35 wt%, such as from 1 to 30 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 25 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 15 wt%, such as from 2 to 12 wt% or even from 5 to 10 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 40 wt%, such as from 1 to 40 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 40 wt%, or even from 2 to 40 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 35 wt%, such as from 1 to 35 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 35 wt%, such as from 2 to 35 wt% or even from 5 to 35 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 30 wt%, such as from 1 to 30 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 30 wt%, such as from 2 to 30 wt%, or even from 5 to 30 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 25 wt%, such as from 1 to 25 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 25 wt%, such as from 2 to 25 wt%, or even from 5 to 25 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 15 wt%, such as from 1 to 15 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 15 wt%, such as from 2 to 15 wt%, or even from 5 to 15 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 12 wt%, such as from 1 to 12 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 12 wt%, such as from 2 to 12 wt%, or even from 5 to 12 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 10 wt%, such as from 1 to 10 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 10 wt%, such as from 2 to 10 wt%, or even from 5 to 10 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating compositions may further comprise a solvent.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise a single solvent or a mixture of solvents.
- the solvent suitably has sufficient volatility to essentially entirely evaporate from the aqueous coating composition during the curing process.
- the curing process may be by heating at from 130-230 °C for from 1 -15 minutes.
- Suitable organic solvents include, but are not limited to the following: aliphatic hydrocarbons such as mineral spirits and high flash point naphtha; aromatic hydrocarbons such as benzene; toluene; xylene; solvent naphtha 100, 150, 200; those available from Exxon-Mobil Chemical Company under the SOLVESSO (RTM) trade name; alcohols such as ethanol; n-propanol; isopropanol; and n-butanol; ketones such as acetone; cyclohexanone; methylisobutyl ketone; methyl ethyl ketone; esters such as ethyl acetate; butyl acetate; n-hexyl acetate; RHODIASOLV (RTM) RPDE (a blend of succinic and adipic esters commercially available from Rhodia); glycols such as butyl glycol; glycol ethers such as methoxypropanol
- the solvent when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts from 5 to 50 wt%, suitably from 6 to 40 wt%, such as from 7 to 30 wt%, or even from 8 to 25 wt% based on the total solid weight of the coating composition.
- the solvent when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts from 10 to 20 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating compositions may further comprise a catalyst. Any catalyst typically used to catalyse crosslinking reactions between acrylic materials and crosslinking agents may be used. Suitable catalysts will be well known to the person skilled in the art.
- the catalyst may be a non-metal or a metal catalyst or a combination thereof.
- Suitable non-metal catalysts include, but are not limited to the following: phosphoric acid; blocked phosphoric acid; phosphatised resins such as, for example, phosphatised epoxy resins and phosphatised acrylic resins; CYCAT (RTM) XK 406 N (commercially available from Allnex); sulfuric acid; sulfonic acid; CYCAT 600 (commercially available from Allnex); NACURE (RTM) 5076 or NACURE 5925 (commercially available from King industries); acid phosphate catalyst such as NACURE XC 235 (commercially available from King Industries); and combinations thereof.
- Suitable metal catalysts will be well known to the person skilled in the art.
- Suitable metal catalysts include, but are not limited to the following: tin containing catalysts, such as monobutyl tin tris (2-ethylhexanoate); zirconium containing catalysts, such as KKAT (RTM) 4205 (commercially available from King Industries); titanate based catalysts, such as tetrabutyl titanate TnBT (commercially available from Sigma Aldrich); and combinations thereof.
- tin containing catalysts such as monobutyl tin tris (2-ethylhexanoate
- zirconium containing catalysts such as KKAT (RTM) 4205 (commercially available from King Industries)
- titanate based catalysts such as tetrabutyl titanate TnBT (commercially available from Sigma Aldrich); and combinations thereof.
- the catalyst when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in any suitable amount.
- the catalyst when present, may be used in amounts from 0.001 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.001 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.05 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.1 to 2 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 1 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the catalyst when present, may be used in amounts from 0.1 to 0.5 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise at least 0.001 wt%, such as at least 0.01 wt%, such as at least 0.05 wt%, or even at least 0.1 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise up to 10 wt%, such as up to 5 wt%, such as up to 3 wt%, such as up to 2 wt%, such as up to 1 wt%, or even up to 0.5 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 10 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 10 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 5 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 3 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 3 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 1 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 1 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 0.5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 0.5 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof.
- Derivatives of phosphoric acid include, but are not limited to blocked phosphoric acid; phosphatised resins such as, for example, phosphatised epoxy resins and phosphatised acrylic resins; and combinations thereof.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise phosphoric acid.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise at least 0.001 wt%, such as at least 0.01 wt%, such as at least 0.05 wt%, or even at least 0.1 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise up to 10 wt%, such as up to 5 wt%, such as up to 3 wt%, such as up to 2 wt%, such as up to 1 wt%, or even up to 0.5 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 10 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 10 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 5 wt% phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 2 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 2 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 1 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 1 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 0.5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 0.5 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise a further resin material.
- Suitable further resin materials will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable examples of further resin materials include, but are not limited to the following: polyester resins; acrylic resins; polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resins; alkyd resins; polyurethane resins; polysiloxane resins; epoxy resins or combinations thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise other optional materials well known in the art of formulating coatings, such as colorants, plasticizers, abrasion-resistant particles, anti-oxidants, hindered amine light stabilizers, UV light absorbers and stabilizers, surfactants, flow control agents, thixotropic agents, fillers, organic co-solvents, reactive diluents, catalysts, grind vehicles, lubricants, waxes and other customary auxiliaries.
- colorants such as colorants, plasticizers, abrasion-resistant particles, anti-oxidants, hindered amine light stabilizers, UV light absorbers and stabilizers, surfactants, flow control agents, thixotropic agents, fillers, organic co-solvents, reactive diluents, catalysts, grind vehicles, lubricants, waxes and other customary auxiliaries.
- the term "colorant” means any substance that imparts colour and/or other opacity and/or other visual effect to the composition.
- the colorant can be added to the aqueous coating compositions in any suitable form, such as discrete particles, dispersions, solutions and/or flakes.
- a single colorant or a mixture of two or more colorants can be used in the aqueous coatings. Suitable colorants are listed in U.S. Patent No. 8,614,286, column 7, line 2 through column 8, line 65, which is incorporated by reference herein.
- Examples for packaging aqueous coatings are those approved for food contact, such as titanium dioxide; iron oxides, such as black iron oxide; aluminium paste; aluminium powder such as aluminium flake; carbon black; ultramarine blue; phthalocyanines, such as phthalocyanine blue and phthalocyanine green; chromium oxides, such as chromium green oxide; graphite fibrils; ferried yellow; quindo red; and combinations thereof, and those listed in Article 178.3297 of the Code of Federal Regulations, which is incorporated by reference herein.
- the colorant when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in any suitable amount.
- the colorant when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts up to 90 wt%, such as up to 50 wt%, or even up to 10 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- Suitable lubricants will be well known to the person skilled in the art. Suitable examples of lubricants include, but are not limited to the following: carnauba wax and polyethylene type lubricants. The lubricant, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts of at least 0.01 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- Surfactants may optionally be added to the aqueous coating composition in order to aid in flow and wetting of the substrate. Suitable surfactants will be well known to the person skilled in the art. Suitably the surfactant, when present, is chosen to be compatible with food and/or beverage container applications. Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to the following: alkyl sulfates (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate); ether sulfates; phosphate esters; sulfonates; and their various alkali, ammonium, amine salts; aliphatic alcohol ethoxylates; alkyl phenol ethoxylates (e.g.
- nonyl phenol polyether may be present in amounts from 0.01 wt% to 10 wt%, suitably from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 2 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of bisphenol A (BPA) and derivatives thereof.
- BPA bisphenol A
- Derivatives of bisphenol A include, for example, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether (BADGE).
- BADGE bisphenol A diglycidyl ether
- BPF bisphenol F
- Derivatives of bisphenol F include, for example, bisphenol F diglycidyl ether (BPFG).
- BPFG bisphenol F diglycidyl ether
- “Substantially free” refers to coating compositions, or components thereof, containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. “Essentially free” refers to coating compositions, or components thereof, containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “Completely free” refers to coating compositions, or components thereof, containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of dialkyltin compounds, including oxides or other derivatives thereof.
- dialkyltin compounds include, but are not limited to the following: dibutyltindilaurate (DBTDL); dioctyltindilaurate; dimethyltin oxide; diethyltin oxide; dipropyltin oxide; dibutyltin oxide (DBTO); dioctyltinoxide (DOTO) or combinations thereof.
- substantially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of epoxy functional compounds.
- substantially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of epoxy material.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of melamine crosslinker materials.
- substantially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of melamine crosslinker material.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of formaldehyde.
- substantially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of formaldehyde.
- the amount of formaldehyde contained in the aqueous coating compositions are the amount of free formaldehyde and/or the amount of formaldehyde in vapor-phase emissions of the composition.
- the amount of free formaldehyde was determined by liquid chromatography according to ASTM D5910-96 (“Standard Test Method for Determination of Free Formaldehyde in Emulsion Polymers by Liquid Chromatography”).
- amount of formaldehyde in vapor-phase emissions of a composition was determined by emission testing according to ASTM D7706-17 (“Standard Practice for Rapid Screening of VOC Emissions from Products Using Micro-Scale Chambers”).
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of styrene.
- substantially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of styrene.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of ethyl acrylate.
- substantially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- essentially free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
- completely free we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
- the aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of ethyl acrylate.
- the aqueous coating compositions optionally do not comprise an emulsion polymerised acrylic material.
- the aqueous coating compositions contain less than 1 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.5 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.1 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.05wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.01 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.005 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied to a substrate, or a portion thereof, as a single layer or as part of a multi layer system.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied as a single layer.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied to an uncoated substrate.
- an uncoated substrate extends to a surface that is cleaned prior to application.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied on top of another paint layer as part of a multi layer system.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied on top of a primer.
- the aqueous coating compositions may form an intermediate layer or a top coat layer.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied as the first coat of a multi coat system.
- coats may comprise any suitable paint such as those containing, for example, epoxy resins; polyester resins; polyurethane resins; polysiloxane resins; hydrocarbon resins or combinations thereof.
- the second, third, fourth etc. coats may comprise polyester resins.
- the second, third, fourth etc. coats may be a liquid coating or a powder coating, suitably a powder coating.
- the coating compositions may be applied on top of a primer.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to a substrate once or multiple times.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to any suitable substrate.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to a metal substrate.
- suitable metal substrates include, but are not limited to, food and/or beverage packaging, components used to fabricate such packaging or monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes.
- the food and/or beverage packaging may be a can.
- cans include, but are not limited to the following, two-piece cans, three-piece cans and the like.
- Suitable examples of monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes include, but are not limited to, deodorant and hair spray containers.
- Monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes may be aluminium monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to food and/or beverage packaging or components used to fabricate such packaging.
- the coatings applied to the interior of metal cans also help prevent corrosion in the headspace of the cans, which is the area between the fill line of the product and the can lid; corrosion in the headspace can be problematic with food products having a high salt content.
- Coatings can also be applied to the exterior of metal cans.
- Certain coating compositions may be applicable for use with coiled metal stock, such as the coiled metal stock from which the ends of cans are made (“can end stock’), and end caps and closures are made (“cap/closure stock’). Since coatings designed for use on can end stock and cap/closure stock may be applied prior to the piece being cut and stamped out of the coiled metal stock, they may be flexible and extensible. For example, such stock may be coated on both sides.
- the coated metal stock is punched.
- the metal is then scored for the “pop-top” opening and the pop-top ring is then attached with a pin that is separately fabricated.
- the end is then attached to the can body by an edge rolling process.
- a similar procedure is done for “easy open” can ends.
- a score substantially around the perimeter of the lid allows for easy opening or removing of the lid from the can, such as by means of a pull tab.
- the cap/closure stock may be coated, such as by roll coating, and the cap or closure stamped out of the stock; it is possible, however, to coat the cap/closure after formation. Coatings for cans subjected to relatively stringent temperature and/or pressure requirements should also be resistant to popping, corrosion, blushing and/or blistering.
- the present disclosure is further directed to a food and/or beverage package coated at least in part with any of the aqueous coating compositions described above.
- the present disclosure is further directed to a food and/or beverage package having a coating on at least a portion thereof, the coating being derived from any of the aqueous coating compositions described herein.
- a “package” is anything used to contain another item, such as for shipping from a point of manufacture to a consumer, and for subsequent storage by a consumer.
- a package will be therefore understood as something that is sealed so as to keep its contents free from deterioration until opened by a consumer.
- the manufacturer will often identify the length of time during which the food or beverage will be free from spoilage, which may range from several months to years.
- the present “package” is distinguished from a storage container or bakeware in which a consumer might make and/or store food; such a container would only maintain the freshness or integrity of the food item for a relatively short period.
- a package according to the present disclosure can be made of metal or non-metal, for example, plastic or laminate, and be in any form.
- An example of a suitable package is a laminate tube.
- Another example of a suitable package is metal can.
- the term “metal can” includes any type of metal can, container or any type of receptacle or portion thereof that is sealed by the food and/or beverage manufacturer to minimize or eliminate spoilage of the contents until such package is opened by the consumer.
- metal can is a food can; the term “food can(s)” is used herein to refer to cans, containers or any type of receptacle or portion thereof used to hold any type of food and/or beverage.
- the term “metal can(s)” specifically includes food cans and also specifically includes “can ends” including “E-Z open ends”, which may be stamped from can end stock and used in conjunction with the packaging of food and beverages.
- the term “metal cans” also specifically includes metal caps and/or closures such as bottle caps, screw top caps and lids of any size, lug caps, and the like.
- the metal cans can be used to hold other items as well, including, but not limited to, personal care products, bug spray, spray paint, and any other compound suitable for packaging in an aerosol can.
- the cans can include “two piece cans” and “three-piece cans” as well as drawn and ironed one-piece cans; such one piece cans often find application with aerosol products.
- Packages coated according to the present disclosure can also include plastic bottles, plastic tubes, laminates and flexible packaging, such as those made from PE, PP, PET and the like. Such packaging could hold, for example, food, toothpaste, personal care products and the like.
- the aqueous coating composition can be applied to the interior and/or the exterior of the package.
- the aqueous coating compositions and/or aqueous coating systems could also be applied as a rim coat to the bottom of the can.
- the rim coat functions to reduce friction for improved handling during the continued fabrication and/or processing of the can.
- the aqueous coating compositions can also be applied to caps and/or closures; such application can include, for example, a protective varnish that is applied before and/or after formation of the cap/closure and/or a pigmented enamel post applied to the cap, such as those having a scored seam at the bottom of the cap.
- Decorated can stock can also be partially coated externally with the aqueous coating described herein, and the decorated, coated can stock used to form various metal cans.
- the aqueous coating composition may be a post repair coating composition, such as a post repair spray coating composition.
- Such coating compositions are specifically designed to be applied to and thereby coat a score line of the package. During the scoring operation, which is often achieved by stamping with a punch, the external varnish layer is cut and therefore the corrosion resistance of the metal substrate is compromised.
- the container is at the beginning of its life cycle which has a minimum of two years.
- the corrosion resistance of the metal substrate is restored by the application of a post repair coating (derived from a post repair coating composition) to the score line.
- This coating is often applied by spraying, such as by an airless spray process.
- the aqueous coating composition may be a single component coating composition (often referred to as a 1 K coating composition) or a multiple component coating composition, such as a two-component coating composition (often referred to as a 2K coating composition).
- a multiple component coating composition the components are provided separately but introduced to each other (by mixing, for example) prior to application. This could be hours before application, for example up to 24 hours before application, or up to 12 hours before application or up to 8 hours before application or up to 4 hours before application.
- the multiple components may be introduced to each other (such as by mixing) during the application process, such as in line mixing, for example.
- the acrylic material may be provided in a first component, while other materials may be provided in a further component, (such as a second component).
- the crosslinker material may be provided in a further component (such as a second component).
- post repair coating composition comprising an aqueous coating composition as defined herein.
- the post repair coating composition may comprise a crosslinking agent, which may comprise carbodiimide.
- a two-component post repair spray comprising an aqueous coating composition as defined herein, wherein the first component comprises an acrylic material and the second component comprises a crosslinker material, which crosslinker material may comprise carbodiimide.
- the first component comprises an acrylic material
- the second component comprises a crosslinker material, which crosslinker material may comprise carbodiimide.
- Metal coils having wide application in many industries, are also substrates that can be coated according to the present disclosure. Coil coatings may comprise a colorant.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied to at least a portion of the metal substrate.
- the aqueous coating compositions when the aqueous coating compositions are applied to a food and/or beverage can, the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to at least a portion of an internal and/or external surface of said food and/or beverage can.
- the aqueous coating composition When the aqueous coating composition is applied to a food and/or beverage can, the aqueous coating composition may be applied to at least a portion of an internal surface of said food and/or beverage can.
- the substrate may be formed from any suitable material. Suitable materials will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable examples include, but are not limited to the following: steel; tinplate; tinplate pre-treated with a protective material such as chromium, titanium, titanate or aluminium; tin-free steel (TFS); galvanised steel, such as for example electro-galvanised steel; aluminium; aluminium alloy; and combinations thereof.
- a protective material such as chromium, titanium, titanate or aluminium
- tin-free steel TFS
- galvanised steel such as for example electro-galvanised steel
- aluminium aluminium
- aluminium alloy aluminium alloy
- the substrate may be formed from steel, tinplate, tin-plate pretreated with a protective material such as chromium, titanium, titanate or aluminium, tin-free steel (TFS), galvanised steel, such as for example electro-galvanised steel or combinations thereof.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied to the substrate by any suitable method. Methods of applying the aqueous coating compositions will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable application methods for the aqueous coating compositions include, but are not limited to the following: electrocoating such as electrodeposition; spraying; electrostatic spraying; dipping; rolling; brushing; and the like.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to the substrate by spraying.
- the aqueous coating composition may be a spray composition.
- spray composition and like terms as used herein is meant, unless specified otherwise, that the aqueous coating is suitable to be applied to a substrate by spraying, i.e. is sprayable.
- the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to a metal substrate by lamination.
- a film may be formed from the aqueous coating composition, which film may subsequently be applied to a metal substrate (such as a package, for example a food or beverage can) by lamination thereon.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied to any suitable dry film thickness.
- the aqueous coating composition may be applied to a dry film thickness from 0.5 to 100 microns (pm), suitably from 0.5 to 75 pm, such as from 1 to 50 pm, or even from 1 to 40 pm.
- the method of making an aqueous coating composition comprises i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; wherein the first and/or second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I: wherein R 1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
- X 1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group
- Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
- X 3 represents a H or alkyl group
- R 2 represents a H or alkyl group
- X 2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group;
- Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
- an aqueous coating composition obtainable by the method of the present disclosure.
- this aqueous coating composition may be obtainable by carrying out the steps of the method sequentially.
- an aqueous coating composition obtained by the method of the present disclosure Suitably, this aqueous coating composition may be obtained by carrying out the steps of the method disclosed herein sequentially.
- solution polymerised means a polymer that is formed by a polymerisation method whereby a monomer is substantially dissolved in a solvent and polymerised. Once said monomer has been polymerised, the resultant solution polymerised acrylic material is suitably substantially soluble in said solvent.
- emulsion polymerised means a polymer that is formed by a polymerisation method whereby a monomer is substantially dispersed in a carrier that includes water to form an aqueous dispersion and polymerised.
- Emulsion polymerisation techniques for preparing emulsion polymers are well known in the polymer arts and any conventional technique may be used.
- the emulsion polymerisation may start with an emulsion comprising, at least, water and a monomer that is substantially insoluble in the said water.
- the monomer may form an oil phase in the aqueous carrier.
- the resultant emulsion polymerised acrylic material is in the form of a stable emulsion of polymer microparticles in the aqueous medium.
- alk or “alkyl”, as used herein unless otherwise defined, relates to saturated hydrocarbon radicals being straight, branched, cyclic or polycyclic moieties or combinations thereof and contain 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- radicals may be optionally substituted with a chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR 19 , OC(O)R 20 , C(O)R 21 , C(O)OR 22 , NR 23 R 24 , C(O)NR 25 R 26 , SR 27 , C(O)SR 27 , C(S)NR 25 R 26 , aryl or Het, wherein R 19 to R 27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialkylsiloxane groups or combinations thereof.
- radicals may be independently selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, 2-methylbutyl, pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, 3-methylpentyl, octyl and the like.
- alkylene relates to a bivalent radical alkyl group as defined above.
- an alkyl group such as ethyl which would be represented as -CH2-CH3, becomes ethylene, -CH2-CH2-, when represented as an alkylene.
- alkylene groups should be understood accordingly.
- alkenyl relates to hydrocarbon radicals having a double bond, such as up to 4, double bonds, being straight, branched, cyclic or polycyclic moieties or combinations thereof and containing from 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 10 carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
- radicals may be optionally substituted with a hydroxyl, chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR 19 , OC(O)R 20 , C(O)R 21 , C(O)OR 22 , NR 23 R 24 , C(O)NR 25 R 26 , SR 27 , C(O)SR 27 , C(S)NR 25 R 26 , or aryl, wherein R 19 to R 27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialkylsiloxane groups.
- radicals may be independently selected from alkenyl groups include vinyl, allyl, isopropenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, 1 -propenyl, 2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, isoprenyl, farnesyl, geranyl, geranylgeranyl and the like.
- alkynyl relates to hydrocarbon radicals having a triple bond, such as up to 4, triple bonds, being straight, branched, cyclic or polycyclic moieties or combinations thereof and having from 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 10 carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
- radicals may be optionally substituted with a hydroxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR 19 , OC(O)R 20 , C(O)R 21 , C(O)OR 22 , NR 23 R 24 , C(O)NR 25 R 26 , SR 27 , C(O)SR 27 , C(S)NR 25 R 26 , or aryl, wherein R 19 to R 27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or lower alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialkylsiloxane groups.
- alkynyl radicals examples include ethynyl, propynyl, propargyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl and the like.
- aryl as used herein, relates to an organic radical derived from an aromatic hydrocarbon by removal of one hydrogen, and includes any monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic carbon ring of up to 7 members in each ring, wherein at least one ring is aromatic.
- radicals may be optionally substituted with a hydroxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR 19 , OC(O)R 20 , C(O)R 21 , C(O)OR 22 , NR 23 R 24 , C(O)NR 25 R 26 , SR 27 , C(O)SR 27 , C(S)NR 25 R 26 , aryl or Het, wherein R 19 to R 27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or lower alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialky Isi Icon groups or combinations thereof.
- radicals may be independently selected from phenyl, p-tolyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-(tert-butoxy)phenyl, 3-methyl-4-methoxyphenyl, 4- fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 3-aminophenyl, 3-acetamidophenyl, 4-acetamidophenyl, 2- methyl-3-acetamidophenyl, 2-methyl-3-aminophenyl, 3-methyl-4-aminophenyl, 2-amino-3- methylphenyl, 2,4-dimethyl-3-aminophenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 3-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2- naphthyl, 3-amino-1 -naphthyl, 2-methyl-3-amino-1 -naphthyl, 6-amino-2-naphthyl, 4,6-dimethoxy-2-
- Hef when used herein, includes four-to-twelve-membered, such as four-to-ten- membered ring systems, which rings contain a heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and mixtures thereof, and which rings may contain a double bond or be non-aromatic, partly aromatic or wholly aromatic in character.
- the ring systems may be monocyclic, bicyclic or fused.
- Hef group identified herein is optionally substituted by a substituent selected from halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, lower alkyl (which alkyl group may itself be optionally substituted or terminated as defined below) OR 19 , OC(O)R 20 , C(O)R 21 , C(O)OR 22 , NR 23 R 24 , C(O)NR 25 R 26 , SR 27 , C(O)SR 27 or C(S)NR 25 R 26 wherein R 19 to R 27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or lower alkyl (which alkyl group itself may be optionally substituted or terminated as defined below).
- Hef thus includes groups such as optionally substituted azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, furanyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, oxatriazolyl, thiatriazolyl, pyridazinyl, morpholinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, piperidinyl, pyrazolyl and piperazinyl.
- Substitution at Het may be at a carbon atom of the Het ring or, where appropriate, at a heteroatom.
- Hef groups may also be in the form of an N oxide.
- alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or aralkyl in composite groups herein should be interpreted accordingly, for example the reference to alkyl in aminoalkyl or alk in alkoxyl should be interpreted as alk or alkyl above etc.
- all numbers such as those expressing values, ranges, amounts or percentages may be read as if prefaced by the word "about", even if the term does not expressly appear.
- the recitation of numerical ranges by endpoints includes all integer numbers and, where appropriate, fractions subsumed within that range (e.g.
- 1 to 5 can include 1 , 2, 3, 4 when referring to, for example, a number of elements, and can also include 1.5, 2, 2.75 and 3.80, when referring to, for example, measurements).
- the recitation of end points also includes the end point values themselves (e.g. from 1.0 to 5.0 includes both 1.0 and 5.0). Any numerical range recited herein is intended to include all sub-ranges subsumed therein.
- polymer refers to oligomers and both homopolymers and copolymers, and the prefix “poly” refers to two or more. “Including”, “for example” and like terms means “including but not limited to”.
- “Including’ and like terms means “including but not limited to”.
- the terms “on”, “applied on/over”, “formed on/over”, “deposited on/over”, “overlay” and “provided on/over” mean formed, overlay, deposited, or provided on but not necessarily in contact with the surface.
- a coating layer "formed over" a substrate does not preclude the presence of another coating layer of the same or different composition located between the formed coating layer and the substrate.
- a two stage-acrylic polymer was prepared from the components of Table 1 as follows:
- the mixture was cooled to 110°C to prepare the solution for vacuum distillation.
- the xylene solvent was removed by vacuum distillation.
- the reactor was set up with a Dean-Stark apparatus to remove residual xylene.
- 664 g of DI water was added over 60 min and the reaction was held at 110°C for 15 min.
- the mixture was cooled to 70°C. After cooling to 70°C, 468 g of dimethylethanolamine was added over 60 min. After this addition, the mixture was held for 15 min then poured out into a suitable container.
- the resultant crosslinker material had a solids content of 64.5% as measured by 110°C solids test.
- Coating Examples 1 -6 are provided in Table 2. Each material in Table 2 was added under stirring. A Mettler AE 200 weighing balance available from the Mettler - Toledo Corporation was used to weigh each material. The paints were allowed to equilibrate for 16 hours before the paints were coated onto flat Aluminum cans.
- ARADUR 3380-1 CH is Benzene-1 ,2.4-tricarboxylic acid 1.2- anhvdride (trimellitic anhydride), oligomeric reaction products with ethane-1 ,2-diol and glycerol, commercially available from Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe)BVBA.
- Average coating film weight was measured using a SENCON SI9600 Coating Thickness Gauge.
- the target film weight was approximately 2.5 milligrams per square inch.
- Commercial spray film weights can vary from 75 milligrams for Beer Weight per 12 oz. can up to 140 milligrams for Energy Weight per 12 oz. can.
- the coated flat Aluminum cans were cut into 2 in by 4 in panels and placed in a rack. Four hundred grams of a 1% JOY detergent solution made in deionized water was added to an 800 milliliter beaker. The solution of JOY detergent in the beaker was heated using a temperature controlled Hot Plate. The panels were added as soon as the solution of detergent reached 82° C and kept in the solution for 10 minutes. The JOY detergent solution covered about the bottom half of the test panels. The panels were removed and tested for adhesion.
- a second set of 2 in by 4 in coated flat Aluminum cans were tested using a 3% or 6% Acetic Acid solution made in deionized water.
- Four hundred grams of the 3% or 6% Acetic Acid solution was added to an 800 milliliter beaker.
- the solution of Acetic Acid in the beaker was heated using a temperature controlled Hot Plate.
- the panels were added as soon as the solution of Acetic Acid started boiling and kept in the solution for thirty minutes.
- the Acetic Acid solution covered about the bottom half of the test panels. The panels were removed and tested for blushing.
- the MEK resistance was determined using a two pound ball hammer using MEK soaked gauze covering the ball end of the hammer. The number of double rubs until the coating failed to the substrate was recorded.
- the equipment used was a 2-pound ball-peen hammer, MEK solvent, an Aluminum guide, masking tape to adhere the test panel to a flat surface, rubber band and Gauze (Fisher Brand 4x4 12 ply)
- the MEK rub test method was:
- test panel was placed on a flat surface.
- a piece of Fisher Brand 4x4 12 ply gauze was arranged over the ball end of a two-pound ballpeen hammer. The gauze was snugly held in place with a rubber band in such a fashion that no wrinkles were formed.
- the cloth was saturated with the appropriate solvent for the material being tested, and the gauze was re-saturated every 25 double rubs.
- the saturated gauze was immediately rubbed over the test area using a back and forth stroke of about 4 to 6 inches without exerting any downward or upward pressure on the hammer handle.
- the weight of the hammer controlled the downward pressure.
- the test result was recorded as the number of double rubs required to expose bare substrate in the center of the rub strip.
- Wire drawdown bars were used to coat the flat Aluminum cans.
- An electric box oven was used for curing. The box oven was set at 380 “F and the coated flat Aluminum cans were baked for 3 minutes.
- Coating Examples 1 and 2 performed as well as the PPG 2012-827B, a commercially available coating for the inside of beverage cans in screening tests. No blushing and no other film defect was observed after the testing. The coatings maintained perfect adhesion after the JOY detergent and Acetic Acid testing. The MEK resistance of the Coating Examples 1 and 2 is equivalent or better than the commercially available coating (PPG 2012-827B).
- Coating Examples 3 to 6 provided good results in screening tests. No blushing and no other film defect was observed after the testing. The coatings maintained perfect adhesion after the Acetic Acid testing.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Materials Engineering (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Paints Or Removers (AREA)
Abstract
An aqueous coating composition comprising: an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; a carrier comprising water; and a further acrylic material, different from the at least acid functional acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I; wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and X1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II; wherein Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H; X3 represents a H or alkyl group; R2 represents a H or alkyl group; X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; wherein the coating composition is substantially free of formaldehyde; and wherein when only one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I, then the wt% ratio of the acrylamide containing acrylic material to the non-acrylamide containing acrylic material is less than 1.2:1.
Description
AN AQUEOUS COATING COMPOSITION AND A PACKAGE COATED THEREWITH
FIELD
[01] The present disclosure relates to an aqueous coating composition and to a package coated on at least a portion thereof with a coating, the coating being derived from an aqueous coating composition. The present disclosure also extends aqueous coating compositions, post repair spray coating composition and to a method of making a coating composition.
BACKGROUND
[02] The application of various treatment and pre-treatment solutions to metals to retard or inhibit corrosion is well established. This can be true in the area of metal food and/or beverage packaging, such as food and/or beverage cans. Coatings are applied to the interior of such containers to prevent the contents from contacting the metal of the container. Contact between the metal and the food and/or beverage can lead to corrosion of the metal container, which can then contaminate the food and/or beverage. This may be of concern when the contents of the can are acidic in nature, such as tomatobased products and soft drinks for example. The coatings applied to the interior of food and/or beverage cans also helps prevent corrosion in the head space of the cans, which is the area between the fill line of the food product and the can lid.
[03] Various epoxy-based coatings and polyvinyl chloride-based coatings have been used in the past to coat the interior of metal cans to prevent corrosion. The recycling of materials containing polyvinyl chloride or related halide-containing vinyl polymers can generate toxic by-products. Moreover, these polymers may be formulated with epoxy-functional plasticizers. In addition, epoxy-based coatings are prepared from monomers such as bisphenol A and bisphenol A diglycidylether ("BADGE'). BPA is perceived as being harmful to human health and it is therefore desirable to eliminate it from coatings. Derivatives of BPA such as diglycidyl ethers of bisphenol A (BADGE), epoxy novolak resins and polyols prepared from BPA and bisphenol F (BPF) are also perceived to be problematic. Government authorities, particularly in Europe, are becoming even more restrictive on the amount of free BADGE or its by-products that are acceptable. Formaldehyde containing crosslinkers have frequently been used in these coatings. Such crosslinkers, on baking, can release free formaldehyde. Formaldehyde is an environmental concern and in view of its widespread use, toxicity and volatility. In 2011 , the US National Toxicology Program described formaldehyde as known to be a human carcinogen. It is therefore desirable to prevent formaldehyde from being released from coatings.
SUMMARY
[04] According to the present disclosure there is provided an aqueous coating composition, comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material;
c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; wherein the coating composition is substantially free of formaldehyde; and wherein when only one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I, then the wt% ratio of the acrylamide containing acrylic material to the non-acrylamide containing acrylic material is less than 1.2:1.
[05] There is also provided an aqueous coating composition, obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; wherein the first monomer component and/or the second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
There is also provided an aqueous coating composition comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group, wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; and wherein at least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material.
[07] According to the present disclosure there is provided an aqueous coating composition, comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II
wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[08] There is also provided a package coated on a least a portion thereof with a coating, the coating being derived from each of the aqueous coating compositions disclosed herein.
[09] There is also provided a post repair spray coating composition comprising each of the aqueous coating compositions disclosed herein.
[10] There is also a method of making an aqueous coating composition, the method comprising:
I) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier;
II) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; wherein the first and/or second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
X1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
[11] The present disclosure also extends to a package, such as a food or beverage can, coated on at least a portion thereof with a coating, the coating being derived from each of the aqueous coating compositions disclosed herein.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[12] The aqueous coating composition may comprise an acrylic material and a further acrylic material. Unless specifically referenced otherwise herein, references to a “acrylic material” refer equally to an acrylic material and to a further acrylic material.
[13] The aqueous coating composition may comprise any suitable acrylic material. The acrylic material is suitably formed from an acrylic monomer. Suitable acrylic monomers will be well known to a person skilled in the art. The acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising more than one acrylic monomer. Suitable acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, alkyl (alk)acrylate, such as Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate, for example, Ci to Ge alkyl (meth)acrylate, and (alk)acrylic acid, such as (Ci to Ge alk)acrylic acid. The acrylic monomers may comprise a functional group, such as an acid group. For example, the acrylic monomer may comprise acrylic acid or methacrylic acid.
[14] The acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an additional ethylenically unsaturated monomer (such as a vinyl monomer). Suitable additional ethylenically unsaturated monomers include, but are not limited to, aryl substituted ethylenically unsaturated monomers such as, for example, styrene; unsaturated carboxylic acids or diacids (or anhydrides), such as maleic acid (or anhydride) or itaconic acid (or anhydride); and combinations thereof. The acrylic material may comprise styrene. Additional ethylenically unsaturated monomers include C2 to Ge alkenes, such as ethylene, propylene, and/or butylene, for example.
[15] Suitable acrylic monomers and/or ethylenically unsaturated monomers may comprise a cyclic alkyl group, for example, isobornyl(methyl)acrylate or monomers derived from isosorbide and/or tetramethyl cyclobutene. By monomers derived from isosorbide, it is meant functionalised isosorbide, suitably, the pendent hydroxyl groups have been reacted to form acid functionalised isosorbide, acrylic functionalised isosorbide epoxy functionalised isosorbide and/or vinyl functionalised isosorbide. By monomers derived from tetramethyl cyclobutene, it is meant functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene, suitably acid tetramethyl cyclobutene, acrylic functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene, epoxy functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene and/or vinyl functionalised tetramethyl cyclobutene.
[16] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) comprises acidic functionality. By this, it is meant that the acrylic material comprises pendant acid groups, such as pendant carboxylic acid groups, for example. This may be achieved, by way of example, by including an acid functional acrylic monomer, such as acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, for example, in the preparation of the acrylic material.
[17] As used herein, “(alk)acrylate”, ”(meth)acrylate” and like terms are used conventionally and herein to refer to both alkacrylate and acrylate, such as methacrylate and acrylate.
[18] Examples of suitable acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate; methyl methacrylate; ethyl acrylate; ethyl methacrylate; propyl acrylate; propyl methacrylate; butyl acrylate; butyl methacrylate, isobornyl acrylate, isobornyl methacrylate, hydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate; ethylene glycol diacrylate; ethylene glycol dimethacrylate; 1 ,6-hexanediol diacrylate; 1 ,6- hexanediol dimethacrylate; 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate; 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate; allyl methacrylate; benzyl methacrylate; phosphate esters of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate; those sold under the trade name SIPOMER such as SIPOMER PAM-100, SIPOMER PAM-200 and SIPOMER PAM-300 (phosphate esters of polypropylene glycol monoacrylate commercially available from Solvay); and combinations thereof. Any other acrylic monomers known to those skilled in the art could also be used.
[19] The acrylic material may comprise acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, ethyl acrylate, ethyl methacrylate, butyl methacrylate, butyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxyethyl acrylate or combinations thereof.
[20] The acrylic material may comprise acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, ethyl methacrylate, ethyl acrylate or combinations thereof.
[21] The acrylic material may comprise acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, ethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate or combinations thereof.
[22] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise any suitable amount of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise from 2 to 75 wt%, such as from 2 to 60 wt%, such as from 2 to 55 wt%, such as from 2 to 50 wt% methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material).
[23] The acrylic material or the further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an optionally substituted styrene or a styrene-mimicking ethylen ically unsaturated monomer. The acrylic material is suitably formed from a substituted styrene monomer component. The substituted styrene monomer component may comprise a 2, 3 or 4- alkyl or aryl substituted styrene.
[24] Examples of suitable substituted styrene monomers include but are not limited to, alpha-methyl styrene; 3,4-alpha-methyl styrene; methyl styrenes such as 2-methyl styrene, 4-methyl styrene (vinyl toluene) and the like; dimethyl styrenes such as 2,3-dimethyl styrene; 2-ethyl styrene; 4-tertbutylstyrene; 4-methoxystyrene; 4-phenylstyrene; 4-phenoxy styrene; 4-propyl styrene; 4-benzylstyrene; 4-cyclohexyl styrene; 4-dodecyl styrene; 4-(phenyl butyl)styrene; 2-methyl-4-isopopyl styrene; 2-ethyl-4-benzyl styrene; halostyrenes such as 4-chlorostyrene, 2,5-dichlorostyrene, 3,4-dichlorostyrene, 2,6- dichlorostyrene, 4-fluorostyrene; divinylbenzene; isopropyl styrene, t-butyl styrene; trans-beta-styrene.
[25] The styrene-mimicking ethylenically unsaturated monomers may comprise an optionally saturated monocyclic group, for example, benzyl acrylate, benzyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate or cyclohexyl methacrylate.
[26] The acrylic material or the further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising terpene monomers or derivatives thereof, rosin monomers or derivatives thereof, cardanol monomers or derivatives thereof. Examples of terpene monomers or derivatives thereof include but are not limited to, monoterpenes such as a-pinene, p-pinene, camphene, sabinene, limonene and myrcene; sesquiterpenes such as bisabolene and nerolidol; and diterpenes. Examples of rosin monomers or derivates thereof include but are not limited to, rosin, rosin acids, abietic acid, neabietic acid, palustric acid, pimaric acid, levopimaric acid, maleopimaric acid, fumaropimaric acid, isopimaric acid, rosin- formaldehyde resin, rosin (meth)acrylate, rosin alcohol and rosin phenol. Examples of cardanol monomers or derivatives thereof of include but are not limited to cardanol, cardanyl (meth)acrylate, cardanol (meth)acrylate, anacardic acid, cardanol glycidyl ether, cardanol-formaldehyde resin, cardanol epoxies, cardanol phenols and cardanol alcohols.
[27] The acrylic material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of styrene. By substantially free in relation to styrene, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. By essentially free in relation to styrene, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. By completely free in relation to styrene, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.01 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. Suitably, acrylic
material is formed from monomers which comprise no, i.e. 0 wt%, styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
[28] Advantageously, the acrylic material may be completely free of styrene.
[29] The acrylic material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of Cs to Ge alkenes. By substantially free in relation to Cs to Ge alkenes, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 10 wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. By essentially free in relation to C2 to Ge alkenes, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. By completely free in relation to C2 to Ge alkenes, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. Suitably, acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.1wt% of C2 to Ge alkenes or even no, i.e. 0 wt%, C2 to Ge alkenes based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
[30] The acrylic material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of ethylene. By substantially free in relation to ethylene, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 10 wt% of ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. By essentially free in relation to ethylene, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. By completely free in relation to ethylene, is meant that the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed. Suitably, the acrylic material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.1 wt% of ethylene, or even, no, i.e. 0 wt%, ethylene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the acrylic material is formed.
[31] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
X1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, a -Y-O-Z group; or is according to formula II;
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[32] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
X1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Formula II wherein
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[33] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
X1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or H;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[34] R1 may represent H or C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Ce alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group. R1 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, I-
propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group. R1 may represent H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group. R1 may represent H.
[35] R2 may represent H or C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Ce alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group. R2 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, I- propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group. R2 may represent H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group. R2 may represent H.
[36] X1 may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group. X1 may represent methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group. X1 may represent a C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group. X1 may represent a -Y-O-Z group.
[37] X2 may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group, or H. X2 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.X2 may represent a H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group. X2 may represent a -Y-O-Z group. X2 may represent H.
[38] X3 may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group, or H. X3 may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group.X3 may represent a H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group. X3 may represent H.
[39] Y may represent a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, such as C1-C10 alkylene bridging group, such as Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group, such as Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group, such as C1-C4 alkylene bridging group. Y may represent methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene or decylene. Y may represent a methylene, ethylene or propylene group.
[40] Z may represent a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as C2-C7 alkyl group, such as C2-C6 alkyl group, or H. Z may represent H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group. Z may represent H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group.
[41] R1, X1 and X2 may each be selected independently from the above lists to for any combination of an acrylamide of formula I. For example, both X1 and X2 may each independently be selected as the same, or different -Y-O-Z groups. At least two of R1, X1 or X2 may be the same. At least X1 and X2 may be different groups.
[42] X1 and X2 may be covalently linked such as to form a cyclic structure.
[43] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I wherein R1 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group; X1 represents a C1-C10 alkyl group or a -Y-O-Z group wherein Y represents a Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group and Z represents a C1-C10 alkyl group; and X2 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group.
[44] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I wherein R1 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group; X1 represents a -Y-O-Z group wherein Y represents a C1-C4 alkylene bridging group and Z represents a C2-C7 alkyl group; and X2 represents H.
[45] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I wherein R1 represents H or methyl; X1 represents a -Y- O-Z group wherein Y represents a methylene or ethylene bridging group and Z represents a Cs-Ce alkyl group; and X2 represents H.
[46] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising n-butoxymethyl acrylamide (NBMA).
[47] The acrylic material may comprise at least 0.5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material, such as at least 1 wt%, such as at least 1.5 wt%, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%. The acrylic material may comprise at least 20 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material, such as at least 30 wt%, such as at least 40 wt%. The acrylic material may comprise at least 2 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material, such as more than 2 wt%.
[48] The further acrylic material may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 3 wt%, such as at least 4 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%. The further acrylic material may comprise at least 20 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 30 wt%, such as at least 40 wt%. The further acrylic material may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 10 wt%, such as at least 15 wt%, such as at least 25 wt%, or even at least 40 wt%. The further acrylic material may comprise at least 5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material, such as more than 5 wt%.
[49] The acrylic material and further acrylic material may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 10 wt%, such as at least 15 wt%, such as at least 25 wt%, or even at least 40 wt%. The acrylic material and further acrylic material may comprise at least 5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material, such as more than 5 wt%.
[50] The aqueous coating compositions described herein may comprise at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 10 wt%, such as at least 15 wt%.
[51] The aqueous coating compositions described herein comprising an acrylic material and further acrylic material wherein only one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I, the wt% ratio of the acrylamide
containing acrylic material to the non-acrylamide containing acrylic material may be less than 1 .2:1 , such as less than 1 :1 , such as less than 0.8:1 , such as less than 0.5:1 .
[52] By non-acrylamide containing material it is meant either the acrylic material or further acrylic material that is not formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I.
[53] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method. Suitably, the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises a solution polymerised acrylic material.
[54] The acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be formed by an emulsion polymerisation method. Suitably, the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material.
[55] The acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method and the further acrylic material may be formed by an emulsion polymerisation method, suitably, the acrylic material may comprise a solution polymerised acrylic and the further acrylic material may comprise an emulsion polymerised acrylic.
[56] The acrylic material may be formed by emulsion polymerisation method and the further acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method, suitably, the acrylic material may comprise an emulsion polymerised acrylic and the further acrylic material may comprise a solution polymerised acrylic.
[57] The acrylic material and further acrylic material may be formed by a solution polymerisation method, suitably, the acrylic material and further acrylic material comprise a solution polymerised acrylic.
[58] Suitable solution polymerisation methods will be well known to a person skilled in the art. The solution polymerisation method suitably comprises a plurality of components, which may be referred to as a solution polymerisation reaction mixture. The solution polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a solution polymerisation monomer component. The solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise the first, second or further monomer component. The solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise a monomer component as described above. The solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise an acrylic monomer as described above. The solution polymerisation monomer component may comprise an ethylenically unsaturated monomer as described above.
[59] The solution polymerisation reaction mixture may further comprise an initiator. The initiator may be a free radical initiator. Suitable initiators include, but are not limited to, tertiary butyl perbenzoate; tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate; tertiary butyl peroxy 2-ethyl hexanoate; di tertiary butyl peroxide; tertiary butyl peracetate; tertiary butyl peroctoate; azo type initiators such as, for example, 2,2’- azobis(isobutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2-methylbutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile) and 2,2'-Azobis(4-methoxy-2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile); persulfate initiators such as, for example, ammonium persulfate, sodium persulfate or potassium persulfate; and combinations thereof. The initiator may be soluble in the solution polymerisation reaction mixture. The initiator may be soluble in the monomer mixture.
[60] The initiator may comprise tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate, tertiary butyl peroctoate, di-tertiary amyl peroxide, or combinations thereof.
[61] The solution polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a solvent or mixture of solvents. Suitable solvents will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Examples of suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, alcohols such as, for example, n-butanol, pentanol or hexanol; glycols such as, for example, butyl glycol; glycol ethers such as, for example, 2-butoxy ethanol, 1 -methoxy propan-2-ol or dipropylene glycol mono methyl ether; and combinations thereof. The solvent may comprise a mixture of solvents, such as n-butanol and butyl glycol. It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that the solvent or mixture of solvents may be chosen such that the monomer mixture is substantially soluble in said solvent or mixture of solvents.
[62] The solution polymerisation monomer component is caused to undergo polymerisation in the solvent or mixture of solvents to form the acrylic material or further acrylic material. The solution polymerisation of the solution polymerisation monomer component may be carried out as a free radical initiated solution polymerisation in a solvent or mixture of solvents.
[63] Solution polymerisation may be carried out in a suitable reaction vessel. The solution polymerisation monomer component, initiator and/or solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel in any suitable order. For example, the solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel before the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added to the reaction vessel. The solution polymerisation monomer component and initiator are added to the reaction vessel at the same time. The solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over any suitable period of time. The solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 0 to 12 hours, suitably 30 minutes to 8 hours, such as 1 hour to 6 hours, or even 2 hours to 4 hours. The solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 3 hours. For the avoidance of doubt, when the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added over a time period of 0 hours, all of the solution polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added at the same time (i.e. in one single addition).
[64] Solution polymerisation may be carried out at any suitable temperature. Solution polymerisation may be carried out at an elevated temperature. Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 80°C to 200°C, suitably from 100 to 180°C, such as from 120 to 160°C, or even from 130 to 150°C. Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 135 to 140°C. Solution polymerisation may be carried out at reflux. Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 80°C or above, such as 100°C or above, such as 120°C or above, such as 130°C or above, or even 135°C or above. Solution polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 250°C or below, such as 200°C or below, such as 180°C or below, such as 160°C or lower, such as 150°C or lower, or even 145°C or lower.
[65] When an acrylamide-containing acrylic and/or further acrylic material is formed by solution polymerisation at a temperature from 80°C to 120°C, covalent linkages between the acrylic material and further acrylic material may not be formed. When an acrylamide-containing acrylic and/or further acrylic
material according is formed by solution polymerisation at a temperature from 120°C to 200°C, covalent linkages between the acrylic material and further acrylic material may be formed.
[66] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by solution polymerisation may have any suitable number-average molecular weight (Mn). The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by solution polymerisation may have an Mn from 500 to 250,000 Daltons (Da = g/mole), such as from 500 to 100,000 Da, such as from 1 ,000 to 50,000 Da, such as from 2,500 to 20,000 Da, or even from 4,000 to 10,000 Da.
[67] As reported herein, the Mn was determined by gel permeation chromatography using a polystyrene standard according to ASTM D6579-11 (“Standard Practice for Molecular Weight Averages and Molecular Weight Distribution of Hydrocarbon, Rosin and Terpene Resins by Size Exclusion Chromatograph)/’. Rl detector, solvent: unstabilised THF, retention time marker: toluene, sample concentration: 10mg/ml).
[68] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by solution polymerisation may have any suitable weight-average molecular weight (Mw). The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by solution polymerisation may have an Mw from 500 to 250,000 Daltons (Da = g/mole), such as from 1 ,000 to 200,000 Da, such as from 2,500 to 100,000 Da, such as from 5,000 to 75,000 Da, such as from 10,000 to 50,000 Da, such as from 10,000 to 30,000 Da, or even from 15,000 to 25,000 Da.
[69] As reported herein, the Mw was determined by gel permeation chromatography using a polystyrene standard according to ASTM D6579-11 (“Standard Practice for Molecular Weight Averages and Molecular Weight Distribution of Hydrocarbon, Rosin and Terpene Resins by Size Exclusion Chromatography”. UV detector; 254nm, solvent: unstabilised THF, retention time marker: toluene, sample concentration: 2mg/ml).
[70] Suitable emulsion polymerisation methods will be well known to a person skilled in the art. The emulsion polymerisation method suitably comprises a plurality of components, which may be referred to as an emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture. The emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise an emulsion polymerisation monomer component. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise the first, second or further monomer component. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise a monomer component as described above. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise an acrylic monomer as described above. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component may comprise an ethylenically unsaturated monomer as described above.
[71 ] The emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may further comprise an initiator. The initiator may be a free radical initiator. Suitable initiators include, but are not limited to, tertiary butyl perbenzoate; tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate; tertiary butyl peroxy 2-ethyl hexanoate; di tertiary butyl peroxide; tertiary butyl peracetate; tertiary butyl peroctoate; azo type initiators such as, for example, 2,2’- azobis(isobutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2-methylbutyronitrile), 2,2'-Azobis(2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile) and 2,2'-Azobis(4-methoxy-2.4-dimethyl valeronitrile); persulfate initiators such as, for example, ammonium persulfate, sodium persulfate or potassium persulfate; and combinations thereof. The initiator may be
soluble in the emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture. The initiator may be soluble in the monomer mixture.
[72] The initiator may comprise tert butyl peroxy 3,5,5 trimethylhexanoate, tertiary butyl peroctoate, di-tertiary amyl peroxide, or combinations thereof.
[73] The emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a solvent or mixture of solvents. Suitable solvents will be well known to a person skilled in the art. The solvent used in emulsion polymerisation, includes but are not limited to, water, a water soluble cosolvent and combinations thereof. Examples of suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, water, methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, n-propanol, n-butanol, t-butanol, butyl cellulose, acetone, N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP), alkylene carbonates, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, methyl-ethyl ketone (MEK), 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol (CARBITOL™), 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethanol (methyl CARBITOL™), (2-(2-Butoxyethoxy)ethanol) (butyl CARBITOL™), glycol ethers, dipropylene glycol ether (Dowanol™), ethyl acetates, glycol ether acetates, ethyl diacetates, propylene glycol, . It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that the solvent or mixture of solvents may be chosen such that the monomer mixture is substantially soluble in said solvent or mixture of solvents.
[74] The emulsion polymerisation reaction mixture may comprise a surfactant or a mixture of surfactants. Suitable surfactants will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable surfactants may be anionic, non-ionic or cationic surfactants. The surfactant may comprise an anionic surfactant. Examples of suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, sodium lauryl sulfate, alpha-olefin sulfonate, nonyl phenol polyethers and salts and similar surfactants. Suitable surfactants may include reactive surfactants which contain a polymerizable moiety that can participate in the emulsion polymerisation reactions. Examples of suitable reactive surfactants include, but are not limited to, those disclosed in Polymeric Surfactants in Emulsion Polymerization, Vol. 35/36, pp. 467-475 (1990), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[75] The emulsion polymerisation monomer component is caused to undergo polymerisation in the solvent or mixture of solvents to form the acrylic material or further acrylic material. The emulsion polymerisation of the emulsion polymerisation monomer component may be carried out as a free radical initiated emulsion polymerisation in a solvent or mixture of solvents.
[76] Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out in a suitable reaction vessel. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component, initiator and/or solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel in any suitable order. For example, the solvent or mixture of solvents may be added to the reaction vessel before the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added to the reaction vessel. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component and initiator may be added to the reaction vessel at the same time. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over any suitable period of time. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 0 to 12 hours, suitably 30 minutes to 8 hours, such as 1 hour to 6 hours, or even 2 hours to 4 hours. The emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator may be added to the reaction vessel over a time period of 3 hours. For the avoidance of doubt, when the emulsion polymerisation monomer
component and/or initiator are added over a time period of 0 hours, all of the emulsion polymerisation monomer component and/or initiator are added at the same time (i.e. in one single addition).
[77] Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at any suitable temperature. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at an elevated temperature. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 80°C to 200°C, suitably from 100 to 180°C, such as from 120 to 160°C, or even from 130 to 150°C. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature from 135 to 140°C. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at reflux. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 80°C or above, such as 100°C or above, such as 120°C or above, such as 130°C or above, or even 135°C or above. Emulsion polymerisation may be carried out at a temperature of 250°C or below, such as 200°C or below, such as 180°C or below, such as 160°C or lower, such as 150°C or lower, or even 145°C or lower.
[78] When an acrylamide-containing acrylic and/or further acrylic material is formed by emulsion polymerisation at a temperature from 85°C to 105°C, covalent linkages between the acrylic material and further acrylic material may not be formed. When an acrylamide-containing acrylic and/or further acrylic material is formed by emulsion polymerisation at a temperature from 110°C to 200°C, covalent linkages between the acrylic material and further acrylic material may be formed.
[79] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by emulsion polymerisation may have any suitable number-average molecular weight (Mn). The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by emulsion polymerisation may have an Mn from 50,000 to 750,000 Daltons (Da = g/mole), such as from 75,000 to 500,000 Da, such as from 100,000 to 300,000 Da, or even from 125,000 to 250,000 Da.
[80] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by emulsion polymerisation may have any suitable weight-average molecular weight (Mw). The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) formed by emulsion polymerisation may have an Mw from 50,000 to 750,000 Daltons (Da = g/mole), such as from 75,000 to 500,000 Da, such as from 100,000 to 300,000 Da, or even from 125,000 to 250,000 Da.
[81] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have any suitable acid value (AV) expressed on solids. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solids of at least 20 mg KOH/g, such as at least 30 mg KOH/g, such as at least 40 mg KOH/g, such as at least 50 mg KOH/g. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solids of from 0 to 400 mg KOH/g, such as from 5 to 350 mg KOH/g, such as from 10 to 250 mg KOH/g, such as from 20 to 200 mg KOH/g, such as from 30 to 150 mg KOH/g, such as from 40 to 100 mg KOH/g, or even from 50 to 80 mg KOH/g.
[82] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have any suitable acid value (AV) expressed on solution. The solution may be a 50 wt% solution in a solvent. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on solution of at least 5 mg KOH/g, such as at least 10 mg KOH/g, such as at least 15 mg KOH/g, such as at least 20 mg KOH/g, such as at least 25 mg KOH/g. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have an AV expressed on
solution of from 0 to 200 mg KOH/g, such as from 2.5 to 175 mg KOH/g, such as from 5 to 125 mg KOH/g, such as from 10 to 100 mg KOH/g, such as from 15 to 75 mg KOH/g, such as from 20 to 50 mg KOH/g, or even from 25 to 40 mg KOH/g .
[83] As reported herein, the acid value (AV) expressed on solids was determined by titration with 0.1 M methanolic potassium hydroxide (KOH) solution. A sample of solid polymer (0.1 to 3g depending on acid number) was weighed accurately into a conical flask and is dissolved, using light heating and stirring as appropriate, in 25ml of dimethyl formamide containing phenolphthalein indicator. The solution was then cooled to room temperature and titrated with the 0.1 M methanolic potassium hydroxide solution. The resulting acid number is expressed in units of mg KOH/g and is calculated using the following equation:
Acid value = titre of KOH solution (ml) x molarity KOH solution (M) x 56.1 weight of solid sample (g)
[84] It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that the method for measuring the acid value (AV) expressed on solution was the same as described above for the acid value (AV) expressed on solids with the exception that the polymer was added to the 25ml of dimethyl formamide containing phenolphthalein indicator as a 50wt% solution in a solvent.
[85] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have any suitable glass transition temperature (Tg). The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may have a Tg from -20 to 150°C, such as from 0 to 120°C, such as from 20 to 100°C, or even from 50 to 80°C.
[86] As reported herein, the Tg was measured according to ASTM D6604-00(2013) (“Standard Practice for Glass Transition Temperatures of Hydrocarbon Resins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry”. Heat-flux differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), sample pans: aluminium, reference: blank, calibration: indium and mercury, sample weight: 10mg, heating rate: 20°C/min).
[87] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may be formed a monomer component comprising an epoxy containing monomer, such as an epoxy containing acrylic monomer, such as, for example, glycidyl methacrylate. Therefore, for example, one or both of the first monomer component and the second monomer component may comprise an epoxy containing monomer, such as an epoxy containing acrylic monomer, such as, for example, glycidyl methacrylate. Therefore, the acrylic material may comprise epoxy groups. In such a scenario, the epoxy group on the acrylic material may be reacted. For example, the epoxy group on the acrylic material may be chemically reacted, such as by reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material, which may thereby remove the epoxy functionality of the acrylic. In this manner, an epoxy reacted material may be formed.
[88] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise any suitable amount of an epoxy containing monomer. The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material) may comprise from 10 to 90 wt%, such as from 30 to 80 wt%, such as from 50 to 75 wt%, such as from 55 to 70 wt% epoxy containing monomer based on
the total weight of the monomers of the acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material).
[89] The epoxy reactive material comprises any material that reacts with the epoxy group to thereby remove the epoxy functionality. Suitable examples of epoxy reactive materials will be well known to a person skilled in the art. The epoxy reactive material may comprise, for example, an acid material, such as an organic acid material. For example, the epoxy reactive material may comprise phosphoric acid, phenyl phosphinic acid, benzoic acid, acetic acid, and/or itaconic acid.
[90] For the avoidance of doubt, as used herein reference to the epoxy group being chemically “reacted’ means that the epoxy group has been removed.
[91] The acrylic material may be formed from a monomer component comprising an epoxy containing monomer. The epoxy group on the acrylic material may be reacted. The epoxy groups on the acrylic material may be reacted by reacting the epoxy group with an organic acid, such as benzoic acid. In this manner, an epoxy reacted acrylic material may be formed. The epoxy group of the acrylic material may be reacted prior to contacting the acrylic material with the second monomer component. The epoxy group of the acrylic material may be reacted prior to contacting the acrylic material with the second monomer component such that all epoxy functionality of the acrylic material is removed prior to contacting the acrylic material with the second monomer component.
[92] There is also provided an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprises an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, which further material is optionally covalently linked to the epoxy reacted acrylic material; wherein at least one of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water;
wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[93] There is also provided an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer;
II) polymerising the first monomer component in carrier to form an acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprises an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic
material, which further acrylic material is not covalently linked to the epoxy reacted acrylic material; wherein the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[94] There is also provided an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer;
ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprising an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material; wherein at least one of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[95] There is also provided an aqueous coating composition obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier, which first monomer component comprises an epoxy functional monomer; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form a acrylic material; wherein the acrylic material comprises an epoxy group; iib) reacting the epoxy group on the acrylic material with an epoxy reactive material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material; wherein the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the epoxy reacted acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H.
[96] The first monomer component may comprise any suitable amount of an epoxy containing monomer. The first monomer component may comprise from 10 to 90 wt%, such as from 30 to 80 wt%, such as from 50 to 75 wt%, such as from 55 to 70 wt% epoxy containing monomer based on the total weight of the first monomer component.
[97] Where the acrylic material comprises epoxy groups, the epoxy reactive material may be added to the acrylic material in any suitable amount. The epoxy reactive material may be added in an amount suitable to react with all of the epoxy groups on the acrylic material. The epoxy reactive material may be added in an amount in excess of the epoxy material, in terms of the equivalents of epoxy to reactive group on the epoxy reactive group. For example, the epoxy reactive material may be added in an amount suitable to react with all of the epoxy groups on the acrylic material to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material that is not epoxy functional. In other words, all of the epoxy functionality has been reacted.
[98] A person skilled in the art will readily be able to use one of many suitable techniques to determine that all of the epoxy functionality has been reacted. For example, this may be confirmed by the epoxy equivalent weight, Infra-Red spectroscopy (using ASTM E168 and ASTM E1252) and triple detector GPC as per ASTM D1652.Using ASTM D1652 the epoxy equivalent weight after being reacted is infinite, demonstrating that the epoxy group is fully reacted with the epoxy reactive group. Infra-red spectroscopy also demonstrates disappearance of epoxy group after reaction with the epoxy reactive group (by disappearance of the epoxy peak in the IR spec).
[99] The second monomer component may comprise methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid. The second monomer component may comprise any suitable amount of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid. The second monomer component may comprise from 10 to 99 wt% of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in the second acrylic material.
[100] By way of example, the aqueous coating compositions may be obtainable by the following pictorially represented approach (labelled Approach 1).
[101] It will be understood that the schematic experimental scheme labelled Approach 1 is representative only of the process and should not be restricted to the individual monomers or any other materials shown thereon. However, its inclusion is useful in generally highlighting how acrylic monomers can be radically polymerised to form an acrylic material (upper) and further acrylic material (lower). The further acrylic material (lower) is then mixed with the acrylic material (upper) to form emulsions/dispersions (right). Alternatively, the acrylic material (upper) may be mixed with further acrylic monomers which are polymerised in the presence the acrylic material (upper) to form a further acrylic
material, and therefore an emulsion/dispersion (top). At least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material (the acrylic material (upper) in Approach 1) contains an acrylamide monomer of formula I. At least one of the acrylic monomers that form the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be ionic. At least one of the acrylic monomers that form the acrylic material and/or further acrylic material may be non-ionic.
Approach 1
[102] By way of example, the aqueous coating compositions may be obtainable by the following pictorially represented approach (labelled Approach 2). It will be understood that the schematic experimental scheme labelled Approach 2 is representative only of the process and should not be restricted to the individual monomers, epoxy reactive material, or any other materials shown thereon. However, its inclusion is useful in generally highlighting how an epoxy functional acrylic material may be formed, then reacted with an epoxy reactive material (in this case, an organic acid) to form an epoxy reacted acrylic material. The further acrylic material (which is acid functional in Approach 2) is then polymerised in the presence of the epoxy reacted acrylic material to lead to a mixture of the two polymers. The materials are then neutralized and dispersed in water to create an aqueous dispersion of the two acrylic materials. At least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material contains an acrylamide monomer of formula I (not shown).
[103] The first and/or second monomer component, suitably one of the first or second monomer component, may comprise methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid. The first and/or second monomer component, such as the first or second monomer component may comprise any suitable amount of methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid. The first and/or second monomer component, such as the first or second monomer component may comprise from 10 to 99 wt%, such as from 15 to 99 wt%, such as from 30 to 95 wt%, such as from 50 to 95 wt% methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in that monomer component. The first and/or second monomer component, such as the first or second monomer component may comprise from 75 to 95 wt%, such as from 80 to 95 wt%, such as from 85 to 95 wt% methacrylic acid and/or acrylic acid based on the total weight of the monomers in that monomer component.
[104] The monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component, may comprise a monomer that comprises a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof. The monomer component, such as the first and/or second monomer component, may comprise a monomer that comprises a phosphonic acid- and/or a sulfonic acid-functional group, or precursor thereof. The monomer component, such as the first and/or second monomer component, may comprise a monomer that comprises a phosphonic acid-functional group, or precursor thereof.
[105] The monomer component of the further acrylic material/the second monomer component may comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof. The monomer component of the further acrylic material/the second monomer component may comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, and further comprise an acrylamide monomer of formula I.
[106] The monomer component of the acrylic material may not comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof. The first monomer component may not comprise a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
[107] The monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof may comprise a vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof. The monomer may comprise vinylsulfonic acid, a vi nylsu If ate, vinylphosphonic acid and/or a vinylphosphate. The monomer may comprise vinylphosphonic acid.
[108] The monomer may comprise a styrene and/or ally monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, for example styrene phosphonic acid and/or allyl phosphonic acid. The monomer may comprise an acrylic monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, for example acrylic phosphate and/or 2-sulfoethylmethacryloate.
[109] The monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component, may comprise from >0.1 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as >0.3wt% or >0.4 wt%.
[110] The monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise <90% of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid- , a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as <60 wt% or <40 wt%.
[111] The monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise from 0.1 to 90 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as from 0.3 to 60 wt% or from 0.5 to 40 wt%.
[112] The monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise <20% of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid- , a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as <15 wt% or <10 wt% or <9 wt%.
[113] The monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component may comprise from 0.1 to 20 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof
by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s), such as from 0.3 to 15 wt% or from 0.3 to 10 wt% or from 0.4 to 9 wt%.
[114] The acrylic material (or at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material), such as an acrylic material formed from a monomer component comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, may have an Mn from 2,500 to 25,000 Da, such as from 4,000 to 15,000 Da.
[115] When the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component comprises a monomer that comprises a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof, the monomer component may be polymerised in the presence of a solvent or in a mixture of solvents that comprises a primary organic solvent, such as butanol.
[116] The acrylic material and the further acrylic material may be present in the aqueous coating composition in a weight ratio of from 1 :100 to 100:1 , such as from 1 :50 to 50:1 , such as from 20:1 to 1 :20, such as from 1 :10 to 10:1. The acrylic material may be present in excess of the further acrylic material in the aqueous coating composition, such as in a ratio of from greater than 1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 15:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 10:1. The acrylic material and the further acrylic material may be present in the aqueous coating composition in a weight ratio of from 1.1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from 1.1 :1 to 10:1 , such as from 2:1 to 8:1 , such as from 3:1 to 7:1 , such as from 3:1 to 5:1.
[117] The further acrylic material may be present in excess of the acrylic material in the aqueous coating composition, such as in a ratio of from greater than 1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 15:1 , such as from greater than 1 :1 to 10:1. The further acrylic material and the acrylic material may be present in the aqueous coating composition in a weight ratio of from 1.1 :1 to 20:1 , such as from 1.1 :1 to 10:1 , such as from 2:1 to 8:1 , such as from 3:1 to 7:1 , such as from 3:1 to 5:1.
[118] In the aqueous coating compositions comprising an acrylic material and a further acrylic material when only one of the acrylic material or further acrylic mater is acid functionalised, the non-acid functional acrylic material may be present in excess of the acid functional acrylic material such as in a ratio of from greater than 1 :1 to 50:1 , such as from greater than 2:1 to 20:1 , such as from greater than 5:1 to 15:1.
[119] Where there are two or more acrylic materials, there may be a covalent linkage between one acrylic material and another acrylic material. There may be a covalent linkage between one acrylic material and another different acrylic material. There may be a covalent linkage between the acrylic material and the further acrylic material.
[120] The covalent linkage between the two or more acrylic materials can be measured and confirmed by many different techniques well known to a person skilled in the art. For example, this can be confirmed by infra-red spectroscopy, GPC, gas chromatography etc. A person skilled in the art will be aware of the appropriate technique to use, depending on the functionality of the solution acrylics in question.
[121] However, as a general technique to determine that there is a covalent linkage between one acrylic material and another acrylic material, for example another different acrylic material, a person skilled in
the art can use triple detector GPC to generate a Mark-Houwink-Sakurada plot of the materials before and after mixing. If the slope of this plot not linear, or linear and shows a gradient of less than 0.5, then there is branched material within the polymers, and therefore linkage between the acrylic materials.
[122] As reported herein Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC) Triple detection was used to characterize the polymer samples and to thereby determine that there is no covalent linkage between one acrylic material and another acrylic material. Samples with solvent were vacuum dried (without heating) prior to analysis. Analysis was performed using a HPLC separation module with a Wyatt Technology Light Scattering detector (DAWN); a differential refractive index detector (Optilab rEX)) and a Differential Viscometer detector (Viscostar). The performance of instrument was validated by a polystyrene standard of 30,000 Da. Tetrahydrofuran (THF) was used as the eluent at a flow rate of 1 ml min 1, and three PL Gel Mixed C columns were used for separation. A Mark-Houwink-Sakurada plot of the materials before and after mixing was generated from the results and the slope and gradient of the plot reviewed the determine if covalent linkage had occurred.
[123] The aqueous coating compositions may comprise any suitable amount of acrylic material. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 10 to 99 wt%, such as from 30 to 99 wt%, such as from 50 to 99 wt%, such as from 70 to 95 wt%, such as from 75 to 95 wt%, such as from 80 to 95 wt% of acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[124] The aqueous coating compositions may comprise at least 10 wt%, suitably at least 25 wt%, such as at least 40 wt%, or even at least 50 wt% of acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise up to 99.9 wt%, suitably up to 99 wt%, such as up to 97 wt%, such as up to 95 wt%, such as up to 92 wt%, or even up to 90 wt% of acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[125] The coating compositions comprise a neutraliser. Suitable neutralisers will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Examples of suitable neutralisers include, but are not limited to tertiary amines such as, for example, dimethylethanolamine (DMEA), trimethyl amine, methyl diethanol amine, ethyl methyl ethanol amine, dimethyl ethyl amine, dimethyl propyl amine, dimethyl 3-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, dimeythylbenzyl amine, dimethyl 2-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, diethyl methyl amine, dimethyl 1-hydroxy- 2-propyl amine, triethyl amine, tributyl amine, N-methyl morpholine; ammonia; hydrazine; metallic aluminium; metallic zinc; water-soluble oxides of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll); water- soluble hydroxides of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll); water-soluble carbonates of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll);and combinations thereof. The neutraliser may comprise a tertiary amine. The neutraliser may comprise dimethylethanolamine (DMEA).
[126] The aqueous coating compositions may comprise any suitable amount of neutraliser. The amount of neutraliser may be a suitable amount to neutralise the acid functionality such that the acrylic material disperses in water. The amount of neutraliser may be a suitable amount to neutralise at least 10%, suitably at least 20%, such as at least 30%, such as at least 40%, or even at least 50% of the acid functionality of the acrylic material. By, for example, ‘neutralise at least 20%’ is meant that at least 20% of the available acid groups of the acrylic material are neutralised. A person skilled in the art will therefore appreciate that at least 30%, at least 40%, at least 50% neutralised etc. means that at least 30%, at least 40%, at least 50% of the available acid groups of the acrylic material are neutralised. The acid
functionality of the acrylic material may be 50% neutralised with the neutraliser. For example, at least 0.1 , at least 0.2, at least 0.3, such as at least 0.4, or even at least 0.5 equivalents of neutraliser may be added to the acrylic material per equivalent of acid groups.
[127] The aqueous coating composition may further comprise a crosslinker material. The crosslinker material may be operable to crosslink the acid and/or hydroxyl functionality of the acrylic material. Suitable crosslinker materials will be well known to the person skilled in the art. It will be understood by a person skilled in the art that the aqueous coating composition may be provided as a single component coating composition or a multiple component coating composition. In the case of a multiple component coating composition, the crosslinker material may be provided in a different component to the acrylic material, for example.
[128] Suitable crosslinker materials include the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer; and an alcohol, amine and/or thiol, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine and/or thiol; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g. Non-limiting examples include wherein the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride includes maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, methyltetrahydrophthalic anhydride, vinylhexahydrophthalic anhydride, chlorendic anhydride, methylendomethylenetetrahydrophthalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, alkenyl succinic anhydrides, such as maleic anhydride.
[129] Suitable crosslinker materials include the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising >70% by weight of a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof by total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed; optionally, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer; and optionally, an alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water , wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivate thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, when present; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g. Non-limiting examples include wherein the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride includes maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, methyltetrahydrophthalic anhydride, vinylhexahydrophthalic anhydride, chlorendic anhydride, methyl-endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, alkenyl succinic anhydrides. The cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may comprise maleic anhydride.
[130] Suitable crosslinker materials include, but are not limited to, maleic acids such as poly(maleic acid); anhydrides such as trimellitic anhydride and its derivatives. A trimellitic anhydride derivative crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of trimellitic anhydride with a hydroxyl-functional hydrocarbon compound, such as the reaction product of trimellitic anhydride with ethane-1 ,2-diol and/or glycerol. Suitable examples of commercially available trimellitic anhydride derivatives include, but are not limited to, those sold under the trade name ARADUR (RTM) 3380-1 commercially available from Huntsman.
[131] Suitable crosslinker materials include, but are not limited to, the following: phenolic resins (or phenol-formaldehyde resins); aminoplast resins (or triazine-formaldehyde resins); amino resins; epoxy resins; epoxy-mimic resins, such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (BPA)
replacements; isocyanate resins, isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate; hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins; carbodiimide resins; oxazolines; and combinations thereof.
[132] Non-limiting examples of phenolic resins are those formed from the reaction of a phenol with an aldehyde or a ketone, suitably from the reaction of a phenol with an aldehyde, such as from the reaction of a phenol with formaldehyde or acetaldehyde, or even from the reaction of a phenol with formaldehyde. Non-limiting examples of phenols which may be used to form phenolic resins are phenol, butyl phenol, xylenol and cresol. General preparation of phenolic resins is described in “The Chemistry and Application of Phenolic Resins or Phenoplasts”, Vol V, Part I, edited by Dr Oldring; John Wiley and Sons/Cita Technology Limited, London, 1997. Suitably, the phenolic resins are of the resol type. By “resol type” we mean resins formed in the presence of a basic (alkaline) catalyst and optionally an excess of formaldehyde. Suitable examples of commercially available phenolic resins include, but are not limited to those sold under the trade name PHENODUR (RTM) commercially available from Cytec Industries, such as PHENODUR EK-827, PHENODUR VPR1785, PHENODUR PR 515, PHENODUR PR516, PHENODUR PR 517, PHENODUR PR 285, PHENODUR PR612 or PHENODUR PH2024; resins sold under the trade name BAKELITE (RTM) commercially available from Momentive, such as BAKELITE 6582 LB, BAKELITE 6535, BAKELITE PF9989 or BAKELITE PF6581 ; SFC 112 commercially available from Schenectady; DUREZ (RTM) 33356 commercially available from SHHPP; ARALINK (RTM) 40-852 commercially available from Bitrez; or combinations thereof.
[133] The crosslinker material may be selected from phenolic resins; hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins; carbodiimide resins, such as polycarbodiimide resins; oxazolines; isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate; oxazolines; epoxy-mimic resins, such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (BPA) replacements; or combinations thereof.
[134] The crosslinker material may be selected from hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins; phenolic resins, hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins; carbodiimide resins, such as polycarbodiimide resins; oxazolines; isocyanurate resins, such as triglycidylisocyanurate; oxazolines; epoxy-mimic resins, such as those based on bisphenols and other bisphenol A (BPA) replacements; or combinations thereof.
[135] The crosslinker material may comprise a phenolic resin, such as a resole phenolic resin.
[136] The crosslinker material may be selected from phenolic resins, hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins, carbodiimide resins, oxazolines or combinations thereof. The crosslinker material may be selected from hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins, carbodiimide resins, oxazolines or combinations thereof. The crosslinker material may be selected from hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins, such as p-hydroxy (alkyl) amide resins and/or hydroxy(alkyl) urea resins.
[137] The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material and/or a hydroxyalkylurea material and/or a carbodiimide resin. The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material and/or a hydroxyalkylurea material.
[138] The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material and a phenolic resin, such as a hydroxyalkylamide material and a resole phenolic resin, such as a p-hydroxyalkylamide material and a resole phenolic resin.
[139] The crosslinker material may contain nitrogen, which may be in the form of an amine or amide material. The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyl substituted amine or amide material.
[140] The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyalkylamide material, such as a p- hydroxyalkylamide material.
Formula I wherein R1 represents an electron withdrawing group, such as (=0); and Y1 and Y2 each, independently, represents a Ci to C3 alkylene group.
The terminal chemical group of Formula I may be connected to a further chemical structure, not shown. Additionally or alternatively, the chemical group of Formula I may be suspended from a carrier substrate, such as a silica carrier substrate, for example.
[142] The hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may contain a plurality of terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula I. For example, the hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may contain 2, 3 or 4 terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula I.
Formula II wherein R1 and R2 with reference to Formula II each, independently, represent an electron withdrawing group, such as (=0); Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4 with reference to Formula II each, independently, represent a Ci to Ca alkylene group; and X is a C2 to C6 alkylene group.
Each of R1 and R2 with reference to Formula II may represent a (=0) group.
Each of Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4 with reference to Formula II may represent an ethylene group.
X may represent a butylene group.
Formula III
[145] The aqueous coating composition may comprise a commercially available hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker such as, for example, PRIMID XL-552 (available from EMS Chemie); PRIMID QM-1260 (available from EMS Chemie); PRIMID SF-4510 (available from EMS Chemie) and N,N,N’,N’-tetrakis(2- hydroxypropyl)adipamide.
[146] The hydroxyalkylamide crosslinker may comprise a polyhydroxyalkylamide material having the formula (IV):
formula (IV) wherein, with reference to formula (IV), Z represents a polymer or an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene or arylene group;
Z’ represents a bivalent organic linking group; m is 0 or 1 ;
X represents a bivalent organic bridging group;
R represents a hydroxyalkylamide group; and n is at least 2
Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent a polymer or an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene or arylene group.
Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent a polymer. Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent any suitable polymer. Suitable polymers include, but are not limited to, acrylic polymers, polyester polymers, polyester amide polymers, polyurethane polymers, epoxy polymers, and combinations thereof. Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer, a polyester polymer or a combination thereof. Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer grafted to a polyester or a polyester grafted to an acrylic polymer.
Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer. Z with reference to formula (IV) may represent an acrylic polymer derived from monomers having ethylenic unsaturation.
[147] Further examples of suitable polyhydroxyalkylamide materials are disclosed in W02020/123893, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[148] The crosslinker material may be in the form of a urea material. The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxyl substituted urea material.
[149] The crosslinker material may comprise a hydroxy functional alkyl polyurea material.
Formula XVII wherein Y5 and Y6 each, independently, represent hydrogen, an alkyl or a hydroxy functional alkyl having two or more carbon atoms and at least one of Y5 and Y6 is a hydroxyl functional alkyl having two or more carbon atoms.
[151] The Y5 and Y6 groups may exclude ether linkages.
[152] The terminal chemical group of Formula XVII may be connected to a further chemical structure, not shown. Additionally or alternatively, the chemical group of Formula XVII may be suspended from a carrier substrate, such as a silica carrier substrate, for example.
[153] The crosslinker material may contain a plurality of terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula IV. For example, the crosslinker may contain 2 to 6 terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula XVII, such as 2, 3 or 4 terminal chemical groups as shown in Formula XVII.
Formula XVIII wherein R with reference to Formula XVIII comprises the residue of an isocyanurate, biuret, allophonate, glycoluril, benzoguanamine, polyetheramine, and/or polymeric moiety having an Mn of 500 or greater; each Ri with reference to Formula XVIII is independently a hydrogen, an alkyl or a hydroxy functional alkyl having 2 or more carbons; and n is 2-6.
[155] The Ri group with reference to Formula XVIII may exclude ether linkages.
Formula XIX
wherein Rg with reference to Formula XIX comprises a substituted or unsubstituted Ci to Cae alkyl group, an aromatic group, or the residue of an isocyanurate, biuret, allophonate, glycoluril, benzoguanamine, polyetheramine, and/or a polymeric moiety having an Mn of 500 or greater; each Ri with reference to Formula VI is independently a hydrogen, an alkyl group having 1 or more carbons, or a hydroxy functional alkyl having 2 or more carbons and at least one Ri with reference to Formula VI is a hydroxy functional alkyl having 2 or more carbons; and n is 2-6.
[157] When Rg with reference to Formula XIX is a substituted or unsubstituted Ci to Cae alkyl group the acid functional polyester material may comprise COOH functionality that reacts with the polyurea to form an ester linkage.
[158] The Ri group with reference to Formula XIX may exclude ether linkages.
[159] R and Rg with reference to Formula XIX may comprise the residue of an isocyanurate, biuret, allophonate, glycoluril, benzoguanamine, polyetheramine and/or polymeric moiety having an Mn of 500 or greater. An isocyanurate will be understood as referring to a compound having three isocyanate groups, such as in ring form, and is sometimes referred to as a trimer. This can include compounds having an isocyanurate moietie.
[160] An example of a hydroxy functional alkyl polyurea crosslinker material formed from an isocyanurate is shown in Formula XX:
Formula XX wherein Ri with reference to Formula XX is as described above with regard to Formula XVIII; and each Rs independently comprises an alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alicyclic, and/or polyetheralkyl group.
[161] A biuret will be understood as referring to a compound that results upon the condensation of two molecules of urea, and is sometimes referred to as a carbamylurea. Biurets are commercial available from Vencore X Chemical and Covestro as, for example, DESMODUR N-75, DESMODUR N- 100, and DESMODUR N-3200, HDB 75B, HDB 75M, HDB 75MX, HDB-LV.
[162] Uretidione is a dimer of diisocyanate, examples of which include DESMODUR N-3400 polyisocyanate, a blend of the trimer and uretidione of HDI:
wherein each R5 independently comprises an alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alicyclic, and/or polyetheralkyl group.
[163] As used herein, an “allophonate” means a compound made from urethane and isocyanate.
[164] As used herein a “glycolurif’ means a compound composed of two cyclic urea groups joined across the same two-carbon chain, an example of which includes the below:
[165] As used herein a “polyether amine” means a compound having an amine group attached to a polyether backbone such as one characterized by propylene oxide, ethylene oxide, or mixed propylene oxide and ethylene oxide repeating units in their respective structures, such as, for example, one of the Jeffamine series products.
[166] Certain hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas of, and/or used may be made by reacting an isocyanate-containing compound with amino alcohol. Any isocyanate-containing compound having at least two isocyanate groups can be used, such as any of those described above.
[167] The hydroxyl functional alkyl polyureas can be made by reacting amino alcohol with an isocyanate-containing compound in an organic polar solvent, such as alcohol or water. The equivalent ratio of amine to isocyanate may be from 2-1 :1 -2, such as 1 :1.
[168] The hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas may be made by alternative methods as well. For example, amino alcohols can react with carbonate to form hydroxylalkyl carbamate, and hydroxylalkyl carbamate can further react with amines to form hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas.
[169] Further examples of suitable hydroxy functional alkyl polyureas are provided in WO2017/123955, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[170] The crosslinker material may be in the form of a carbodiimide resin. The crosslinker may comprise a polycarbodiimide. Suitably, the crosslinker may comprise a polycarbodiimide having the following structural units (XXVI) or (XXVII) including mixtures thereof:
where e is an integer of from 2 to 20; f and g are each at least 1 , and f+g is an integer up to 20; E is a radical selected from
where R2 with reference to structural units (XXVIII) or (XXIX) comprises a cyclic radical and R3 with reference to (XXVIII) or (XXIX) is a linear hydrocarbon radical containing at least 4 carbon atoms and R4 with reference to (XXIX) is hydrogen or an alkyl radical.
[171] The polycarbodiimides may be prepared by reacting an organic group containing a polyisocyanate in the presence of a suitable catalyst to form a polycarbodiimide having terminal NCO- functionality, wherein an active hydrogen-containing compound is added before, during or after polycarbodiimide formation.
[172] The polyisocyanate may be an aliphatic, including cycloaliphatic, or an aromatic polyisocyanate or mixture of the two. The aliphatic may comprise cycloaliphatic polyisocyanate and/or alkaryl polyisocyanate. The polyisocyanate may comprise from 2 to 4, such as 2 isocyanate groups per molecule. Examples of suitable higher polyisocyanates are 1 ,2,4-benzene triisocyanate and polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, or combinations thereof. Examples of suitable aromatic diisocyanates are 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 1 ,3-phenylene diisocyanate, 1 ,4-phenylene diisocyanate and tolylene diisocyanate or combinations thereof. Examples of suitable aliphatic diisocyanates are straight chain aliphatic diisocyanates, such as 1 ,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate and 1 ,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate; and alkaryl polyisocyanates, such as m-tetramethylxylene diisocyanate or combinations thereof. Cycloaliphatic diisocyanates may be employed. Examples include 1 ,4-cyclohexyl diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, alpha, alpha-xylylene diisocyanate and 4,4- methylene-bis(cyclohexyl isocyanate) or combinations thereof. Substituted organic group-containing polyisocyanates may be used in which the substituents comprise nitro, chloro, alkoxy and/or other groups that are not reactive with hydroxyl groups or active hydrogens and provided the substituents are not positioned to render the isocyanate group unreactive.
[173] The active hydrogen-containing compound used in the preparation of the polycarbodiimide may be a chain extender or spacer linking polyisocyanates together to form NCO-adducts or to link NCO- functional polycarbodiimides together. Any suitable organic compound containing active hydrogens may be used. As used herein, "active hydrogen atoms” means hydrogens which, because of their position in the molecule, display activity according to the Zerewitinoff test. Accordingly, active hydrogens include hydrogen atoms attached to oxygen or nitrogen, and thus useful compounds will include those having at least two of these groups (in any combination):
-OH, and -NH2
[174] The moieties attached to each group may be aliphatic, including cycloaliphatic, aromatic, or of a mixed type with aliphatic may be suitable.
[175] The active hydrogen-containing material may comprise from 2 to 4, such as 2 active hydrogens per molecule.
[176] Examples of such compounds include amines, which includes polyamines; aminoalcohols; mercapto-terminated derivatives; and alcohols, such as polyhydroxy materials (polyols) which may provide an easier reaction with a polyisocyanate, or combinations thereof. A polyol may give fewer side reactions, which may give higher yields of urethane product with lower by-product and/or the products may be hydrolytically stable. With regard to polyols, there are a wide variety of materials available which can be selected to give a wide spectrum of desired properties. In addition, a polyol may a have desirable reaction rate with polyisocyanates. Both saturated and unsaturated active hydrogen-containing compounds can be used, such as a saturated material, which may provide improved coating properties.
[177] The polyhydroxyl material or polyol may be a low or high molecular weight material and in general will have average hydroxyl values as determined by ASTM designation E-222-67, Method B, of 2000 and below, such as from 2000 and 10. As used herein, "polyol’ means materials having an average of two or more hydroxyl groups per molecule.
[178] The polyol may comprise a low molecular weight diol, triol, a higher molecular weight polyol, a low molecular weight amide-containing polyol and a higher polymeric polyol, or a combination thereof, such as a polyester polyol, polyether polyol, polycarbonate polyol and hydroxy-containing (meth)acrylic polymer or a combination thereof. The polymer may have a hydroxyl value of from 10 to 180. The polymers may have number average molecular weight of from 96 to 10,000 Da.
[179] Suitable low molecular weight diol, triol and higher alcohol will be known by a person skilled in the art. They may have a hydroxy value of 200 or above, such as within the range of from 200 to 2000. Such materials include aliphatic polyol, such as alkylene polyol containing from 4 to 18 carbon atoms. Examples include 1 ,4-butanediol and 1 ,6-hexanediol, or combinations thereof. The polyol may comprise an ether linkage such as diethylene glycol and tetraethylene glycol or combinations thereof.
[180] To form the polycarbodiimide, the polyisocyanate with or without the active hydrogen-containing compound may be condensed with the elimination of carbon dioxide to form the polycarbodiimide, that is, a polymer containing [N=C=N]n units where n with reference to the [N=C=N] = 2 to 20, such as 2 to 10.
[181] The condensation reaction may be conducted by taking the solution of the polyisocyanate and heating in the presence of suitable catalyst. Examples of catalyst include 1 -ethyl-3-phospholine, 1 -ethyl- 3-methyl-3-phospholine-1 -oxide, 1 -ethyl-3-methyl-3-phospholine-1 -sulfide, 1 -ethyl-3-methyl- phospholidine, 1 -ethyl-3-methyl-phospholidine-1 -oxide, 3-methyl-1 -phenyl-3-phospholine-1 -oxide and bicyclic terpene alkyl or hydrocarbyl aryl phosphine oxide or camphene phenyl phosphine oxide or combinations thereof.
[182] The amount of catalyst used will depend to a large extent on the reactivity of the catalyst itself and the polyisocyanate being used. A concentration range of from 0.05-5 parts of catalyst per 100 parts of adduct is generally suitable.
[183] Further examples of suitable carbodiimide crosslinker materials are provided in WO2017/122171 , the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[184] The crosslinker material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of formaldehyde. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to crosslinker material containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to crosslinker material containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to crosslinker material containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof. The crosslinker material may comprise 0 wt% of formaldehyde.
[185] The crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising:
(i) a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof;
(ii) an ethylenically unsaturated monomer; and
(iii) an alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g.
[186] The crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising:
(i) >70% by weight of a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof by total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed;
(ii) optionally, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer;
(iii) and optionally, an alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivate thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, when present; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g.
[187] The cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be any suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride. The cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be any suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride that is able to undergo polymerisation, for example, free radical polymerisation, optionally with an ethylenically unsaturated monomer. Suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides will be known to a person skilled in the art. Examples of suitable cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides include, but are not limited to, maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, methyltetrahydrophthalic anhydride, vinylhexahydrophthalic anhydride, chlorendic anhydride, methyl-endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, alkenyl succinic anhydrides such as, for example, allyl succinic anhydride and dodecenyl succinic anhydride, norbornene anhydride and combinations thereof.
[188] The cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be maleic anhydride.
[189] ‘Diacid derivative’ of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride, and like terms as used herein, refers to the diacid derivative of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides as defined herein that results from the
hydrolysis of the anhydride group. A person skilled in the art will understand that the cyclic anhydride group will become non-cyclic upon hydrolysis.
[190] Thus, examples of suitable diacid derivatives of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydrides include, but are not limited to, maleic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, vinylhexahydrophthalic acid, endomethylenetetra-hydrophthalic acid, chlorendic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, alkenyl succinic acids such as, for example, allyl succinic acid and dodecenyl succinic acid, norbornene acid and combinations thereof.
[191] The diacid derivative of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride may be maleic acid.
[192] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise an acrylic monomer. Suitable acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, alkyl (alk)acrylate, such as Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate, for example, Ci to Ge alkyl (meth)acrylate, and (alk)acrylic acid, such as (Ci to Ge alk)acrylic acid. The acrylic monomers may comprise a functional group, such as an epoxy group. For example, the acrylic monomers may comprise glycidyl methacrylate.
[193] Examples of suitable acrylic monomers include, but are not limited to, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate; methyl methacrylate; ethyl acrylate; ethyl methacrylate; propyl acrylate; propyl methacrylate; isopropyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, butyl acrylate; butyl methacrylate, pentyl acrylate, pentyl methacrylate, isoamyl acrylate, isoamyl methacrylate, hexyl acrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, decyl acrylate decyl methacrylate, isodecyl acrylate, isodecyl methacrylate, lauryl acrylate, lauryl methacrylate, octyl acrylate, octyl methacrylate, nonyl acrylate, nonyl methacrylate isobornyl acrylate, isobornyl methacrylate, hydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxypropyl methacrylate, hydroxypropyl acrylate, phenoxy ethyl acrylate 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate; ethylene glycol diacrylate; ethylene glycol dimethacrylate; 1 ,6-hexanediol diacrylate; 1 ,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate; 4- hydroxybutyl acrylate; 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate; allyl methacrylate; benzyl methacrylate; phosphate esters of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate; those sold under the trade name SIPOMER such as SIPOMER PAM-100, SIPOMER PAM-200 and SIPOMER PAM-300 (phosphate esters of polypropylene glycol monoacrylate commercially available from Solvay); acrylamides such as, for example, acrylamide methacrylamide, N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-ethylacrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, diacetone acrylamide, N,N-diethylacrylamide, N-isopropylacrylamide and N-isopropylmethacrylamide; 2- acrylamido-2-methyl-1 -propanesulfonic acid; and combinations thereof. Any other acrylic monomers known to those skilled in the art could also be used.
[194] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise a hydroxyl functional monomer, such as a hydroxyl functional acrylic monomer. The ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise a hydroxyl functional alkyl(alk)acrylate, for example, hydroxyl functional Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate, such as hydroxyl functional Ci to Ge alkyl (meth)acrylate or hydroxyl functional Ci to Ge alkyl (Ci to Ge alk)acrylate. Examples of suitable hydroxyl functional acrylic monomer(s) include, but are not limited to, hydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxymethyl acrylate, hydroxymethyl methacrylate, hydroxypropyl acrylate, hydroxypropyl methacrylate, hydroxybutyl acrylate, hydroxybutyl methacrylate, hydroxypentyl acrylate, hydroxypentyl acrylate, hydroxyhexyl methacrylate, hydroxyhexyl methacrylate, methyl 2-(hydroxymethyl)acrylate and/or ethyl 2-(hydroxymethyl)acrylate. The ethylenically unsaturated
monomer may comprise hydroxyethyl acrylate and/or hydroxyethyl methacrylate, such as hydroxyethyl acrylate.
[195] The hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, 2-hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, 2-(2-hydroxyethyl) ethyl vinyl ether, and/or hydroxystyrene.
[196] The hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise the reaction product of (meth)acrylic acid with an epoxy (such as Cardura E10) and/or the reaction product of glycidyl methacrylate with a carboxylic acid functional component (such as a benzoic acid, aliphatic acid).
[197] The crosslinker material may comprise >2.5% hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed, such as >5 wt%, or >7 wt%, or >10 wt%.
[198] The crosslinker material may comprise <50% hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed, such as <40 wt%, or <30 wt%, or <20 wt%.
[199] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise a vinyl ether monomer. Examples of suitable vinyl ether monomers include, but are not limited to, methyl vinyl ether, ethyl vinyl ether, n- propyl vinyl ether, isopropyl vinyl ether, n-butyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether, t-butyl vinyl ether, pentyl vinyl ether, cyclopentyl vinyl ether, hexyl vinyl ether, cyclohexyl vinyl ether, 2-ethylhexyl vinyl ether, 2- hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, 1 ,4-butanediol divinyl ether, diethyleneglycol divinyl ether, triethyleneglycol divinyl ether, 1 ,4-cyclohexanedimethanol divinyl ether, 2-(2-hydroxyethyl) ethyl vinyl ether, octyl vinyl ether, benzyl vinyl ether, phenyl vinyl ether, phenethyl vinyl ether, allyl vinyl ether and combinations thereof.
[200] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer may comprise an additional ethylenically unsaturated monomer. Examples of suitable additional ethylenically unsaturated monomers include, but are not limited to, aryl substituted ethylenically unsaturated monomers such as, for example, styrene, a- methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, chloromethylstyrene, 4-hydroxystyrene, diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,4- diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,5-diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,6-diglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,3,4- triglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,3,5-triglycidyl oxime styrene, 2,3,6-triglycidyloxymethylstyrene and 3,4,5- triglycidyloxymethylstyrene, 2,4,6-triglycidyloxymethylstyrene, ethylenically unsaturated nitriles such as, for example, acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile, vinyl esters such as, for example, vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate, ethene, propene, 1 -butene, 2-butene, 1 -pentene, 2-pentene, 1, -hexene, 2-hexene, 3- hexene, 1-hetpene, 2-heptene, 3-heptene, 1 -octene, 2-octene, 3-octene, 4-octene, isobutylene, vinyl chloride, butadiene, isoprene, chloroprene, N-vinyl monomers such as, for example, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, N-vinyl caprolactam and N-vinyl acetamide, unsaturated fatty acid ester; allyl glycidyl ether, allyl ethyl ether and combinations thereof. The additional ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise monomers, oligomers and/or polymers of the aforementioned monomers. For example, butadiene may be in the form of a monomer or may be in the form of polybutadiene.
[201] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, a vinyl ether monomer, vinyl acetate or combinations thereof.
[202] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether, vinyl acetate or combinations thereof.
[203] The unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may comprise maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether, vinyl acetate or combinations thereof.
[204] The unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may comprise maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether, vinyl acetate and/or a hydroxyl functional monomer (such as hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate).
[205] The ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise isobutyl vinyl ether.
[206] The unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may comprise maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) may comprise isobutyl vinyl ether.
[207] The crosslinker material may comprise at least 75 wt% of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, such as maleic anhydride and/or maleic acid, such as at least 80 wt%, such as at least 85 wt%, such as at least 90 wt%, such as at least 95 wt% or at least 97 wt% or at least 98 wt% or at least 99 wt% or >99 wt%, or at least 99.1 wt%, or at least 99.5 wt% or at least 99.9wt% or 100wt% cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
[208] For the avoidance of doubt, by ‘the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed’ as used herein is meant the total solid weight of (i) a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof, (ii) an ethylenically unsaturated monomer, when present, and any additional monomer(s) present and does not include (ill) an alcohol, amine and/or thiol, when present.
[209] The crosslinker material may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of styrene. By substantially free in relation to styrene, is meant that the crosslinker material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 5 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed. By essentially free in relation to styrene, is meant that the crosslinker material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 1 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed. By completely free in relation to styrene, is meant that the crosslinker material is formed from monomers which comprise less than 0.01 wt% of styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed. The crosslinker material may be formed from monomers which comprise no, i.e. 0 wt%, styrene based on the total weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
[210] The crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising (iii) an alcohol, amine thiol and/or water, such as with alcohol, amine and/or thiol.
[211] The alcohol may be any suitable alcohol. Suitable alcohols will be known to a person skilled in the art. The alcohol may be an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic C1-C20 alkanol, an aryl alcohol or combinations thereof. The alcohol may be a monohydric alcohol or a polyol, such as a diol, triol, tetraol etc., for example.
[212] The alcohol may be methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, butoxy ethanol, methoxy propanol or combinations thereof.
[213] The alcohol may be an aryl alcohol. Examples of suitable aryl alcohols include, but are not limited to, phenol, benzyl alcohol, phenethyl alcohol, phenylpropyl alcohol, phenoxy ethanol, phenyl carbinol, methylphenyl carbinol, cresol, hydroxyalkylated bisphenols and combinations thereof.
[214] The amine may be any suitable amine. Suitable amines will be known to a person skilled in the art. The amine may be an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic C1-C20 amine, such as a C1-C10 amine, such as a C1-6 amine, such as a C1-C4 amine, such as a C1-C3 amine, such as a C1-C2 amine, or even ethylamine. The amine may be an aryl amine. The amine may be a polyamine such as, for example, a diamine, triamine etc.
[215] Examples of suitable amines include, but are not limited to, methylamine, ethylamine, propylamine, isopropylamine, butylamine, isobutylamine, t-butylamine, benzylamine, polyetheramines such as, for example, those sold under the trade name JEFFAMINE (commercially available from Huntsman Corporation) or combinations thereof.
[216] The thiol may be any suitable thiol. Suitable thiols will be known to a person skilled in the art. Examples of suitable thiols include, but are not limited to, methanethiol, ethanethiol, 1 -propanethiol, 2- propanethiol, 1 -butanethiol, 2-butanethiol, beta-mercaptopropionic acids and/or esters, thiolglycolic acids and/or esters, thiophenol and combinations thereof. The thiol may be a monothiol or a polythiol, such as a dithiol, trithiol, tetrathiol etc., for example.
[217] The alcohol, amine and/or thiol may have further functionality. For example, the alcohol may also have amine, acid, thiol, cyclic carbonate, hydroxy, epoxy or oxazoline functionality. For example, the amine may also have alcohol, acid, thiol, cyclic carbonate, hydroxy, epoxy or oxazoline functionality. For example, the thiol may also have amine, alcohol, acid, cyclic carbonate, hydroxy, epoxy or oxazoline functionality. It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that, for example, an alcohol also having amine functionality may be the same as an amine also having alcohol functionality. Examples of suitable alcohols, amines and/or thiols also having further functionality include, but are not limited to alkanolamines such as, for example, methanolamine, ethanolamine, methyl ethanolamine, ethyl ethanolamine, N-methyl ethanolamine, N-ethyl ethanolamine, 1 -amino-2-propanol, 3-amino-1 -propanol, 4-amino-1 -butanol, 1 -amino-2-butanol, 1-amino-3-butanol, dimethanolamine; diethanolamine, dipropanolamine, diisopropanolamine and methyl diethanolamine, hydroxyl and/or alkoxy-substituted oxazolines such as, for example, 2-propyl-4-methyoxy oxazoline, glycerol carbonate, glycidol, mercaptoethanol, glycolic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, thiomalic acid and combinations thereof.
[218] The amine and/or thiol may be a hydroxy functional amine and/or thiol. The hydroxy functional amine and/or thiol may comprise a hydroxyl group. The hydroxy functional amine may be an alkanolamine for example an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic C1-C20 alkanolamine, such as a C1-C10 alkanolamine, such as a Ci-Ce alkanolamine, such as a C1-C4 alkanolamine, such as a C1-C3 alkanolamine, such as a C1-C2 alkanolamine, or even ethanolamine. The hydroxyl functional amine may be an alkanolamine comprising two or more hydroxyl groups. For example, the hydroxy functional amine may be a dialkanolamine or a trialkanolamine, Each alkanol group may independently comprise C1-C20 alkanol, such as C1-C10 alkanol, or C1-6 alkanol, or C1-C3 alkanol, such as dimethanolamine; diethanolamine, dipropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, such as diisopropanolamine.
[219] The alcohol may comprise at least two hydroxyl groups.
[220] The crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of the reaction mixture comprising (iii) an alcohol, amine and/or thiol wherein the amine and/or thiol comprises a hydroxy group and the alcohol comprises at least two hydroxy groups.
[221] The crosslinker material may comprise the reaction product of a reaction mixture wherein >10%, such as >25 mol%, such as >40 mol%, such as >50 mol% of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an amine and/or thiol comprising a hydroxy group, and/or an alcohol comprising two or more hydroxy groups.
[222] The use of alcohols, amines and/or thiols also having further functionality can allow for the crosslinker material to be dual-curing due to the further functionality that remains available for crosslinking, such that the crosslinker material may react with a suitable functional group of the binder and/or the suitable functional group of the crosslinker material.
[223] At least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof may be reacted with the alcohol, amine thiol and/or water, such as with alcohol, amine and/or thiol, when present. It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that reacting a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol results in the esterification, amidation and/or thioesterification of one or each of the acid groups of said cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof. When a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol the monoester derivative may be formed. However, alternatively, the diester derivative is formed. By ‘monoester derivative’, and like terms as used herein, is meant that one of the acid groups of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol (to form an ester, amide and/or thioester group). By ‘diester derivative’, and like terms as used herein, is meant that both of the acid groups of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an alcohol, amine and/or thiol (to form an ester, amide and/or thioester group). When a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride is used, the reaction product may be obtained by reacting said alcohol, amine and/or thiol with the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride under conditions which can effect the ring-opening reaction of the acid anhydride but which do not substantially cause a polyesterification, polyamidation and/or thioesterification reaction and/or formation of the diester, diamide and/or dithioester derivative.
[224] The crosslinker material may have an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g.
[225] The crosslinker material may have an acid number of at least 200 mg KOH/g, such as at least 300 mg KOH/g, such as at least 400 mg KOH/g, such as at least 500 mg KOH/g, or even at least 600 mg KOH/g.
[226] The crosslinker material may have an acid number up to 1 ,000 mg KOH/g, such as up to 975 mg KOH/g, such as up to 950 mg KOH/g, such as up to 925 mg KOH/g, or even up to 900 mg KOH/g.
[227] The crosslinker material may have an acid number from 100 to 1 ,000 mg KOH/g, such as from 200 to 975 mg KOH/g, such as from 300 to 950 mg KOH/g, such as from 400 to 925 mg KOH/g or even from 500 to 900 mg KOH/g or from 600 to 900 mg KOH/g.
[228] The acid groups of the crosslinker material may be at least partially neutralised by contacting said crosslinker material with a neutraliser. Thus, the crosslinker material may comprise a neutraliser.
Suitable neutralisers will be known to a person skilled in the art. Examples of suitable neutralisers include, but are not limited to, tertiary amines such as, for example, dimethylethanolamine (DMEA), trimethyl amine, N-methyl diethanol amine, N-ethyl N-methyl ethanol amine, N,N-dimethyl ethyl amine, N,N-dimethyl propyl amine, N,N-dimethyl 3-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, N,N-dimeythylbenzyl amine, N,N- dimethyl 2-hydroxy-1 -propyl amine, N,N-diethyl methyl amine, N,N-dimethyl 1 -hydroxy-2-propyl amine, triethyl amine, tributyl amine, N,N-dimethyl dodecylamine, N-methyl morpholine; ammonia; hydrazine; metallic aluminium; metallic zinc; water-soluble oxides of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll); water-soluble hydroxides of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll); water-soluble carbonates of the elements Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Fe(ll) and Sn(ll);and combinations thereof. The neutraliser may comprise a tertiary amine. The neutraliser may comprise dimethylethanolamine (DMEA).
[229] The crosslinker material may have a hydroxyl value of >2 mg KOH/g, such as of >5 mg KOH/g, or of >10 mg KOH/g.
[230] The crosslinker material may have a hydroxyl value of <230 mg KOH/g, such as <180mg KOH/g, or <140 mg KOH/g.
[231] The crosslinker material may have a hydroxyl value from 2 to 230 mg KOH/g, such as from 5 to 180 mg KOH/g, such as from 10 to 140 mg KOH/g.
[232] The crosslinker material may have any suitable glass transition temperature (Tg). The crosslinker material may have a Tg of at least 0°C, such as at least 20°C, such as at least 30°C, such as at least 40°C, such as at least 50°C, such as at least 60°C, such as at least 70°C, such as at least 80°C, such as at least 90°C, or even at least 100°C. The crosslinker material may have a Tg of up to 300°C, such as up to 250°C, such as up to 225°C.
[233] The crosslinker material may have any suitable number average molecular weight (Mn). The crosslinker material may have an Mn of at least 300 Da (Da = g/mole), such as at least 400 Da, or at least 500 Da.
[234] The crosslinker material may have an Mn of up to 5,000 Da, such as up to 3,000 Da or up to 2,000 Da.
[235] The crosslinker material may have an Mn of from 300 to 5,000 Da, such as from 400 to 3,000 Da, such as from 500 to 2,000 Da.
[236] The crosslinker material may have an Mw of at least 450 Da (Da = g/mole), such as at least 600 Da, or at least 800 Da.
[237] The crosslinker material may have an Mw of up to 8,000 Da, such as up to 5,000 Da, or up to 4,000 Da.
[238] The crosslinker material may have an Mw from 450 to 8,000 Da such as from 600 to 5,000 Da, such as from 800 to 4,000 Da.
[239] The coating composition may comprise any suitable amount of the crosslinker material reaction product. The coating composition may comprise at least 2wt%, or at least 3wt%, such as at least 5 wt%, such as at least 8 wt% of the crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the coating composition.
The coating composition may comprise up to 90 wt%, such as up to 80 wt%, such as up to 70 wt%, such as up to 60 wt%, such as up to 50 wt%, such as up to 40 wt%, such as up to 30 wt%, or even 25 wt% of the crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the coating composition.
[240] Further examples of such suitable crosslinker materials are provided in US application 16/832,108 and PCT/US2021/024078, the contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[241] The aqueous coating compositions may comprise any suitable amount of crosslinker material operable to crosslink acid and/or hydroxyl functionality on the acrylic material.
[242] The crosslinker material may be present in an amount of less than 40 wt% of the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 35 wt%, such as less than 30 wt%, such as less than 25 wt%, such as less than 15 wt%, such as less than 12 wt%, such as less than 10 wt%. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 40 wt%, such as from 1 to 35 wt%, such as from 1 to 30 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 25 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 15 wt%, such as from 2 to 12 wt% or even from 5 to 10 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[243] The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 40 wt%, such as from 1 to 40 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 40 wt%, or even from 2 to 40 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 35 wt%, such as from 1 to 35 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 35 wt%, such as from 2 to 35 wt% or even from 5 to 35 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 30 wt%, such as from 1 to 30 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 30 wt%, such as from 2 to 30 wt%, or even from 5 to 30 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 25 wt%, such as from 1 to 25 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 25 wt%, such as from 2 to 25 wt%, or even from 5 to 25 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 15 wt%, such as from 1 to 15 wt%, such as from 1 .5 to 15 wt%, such as from 2 to 15 wt%, or even from 5 to 15 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 12 wt%, such as from 1 to 12 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 12 wt%, such as from 2 to 12 wt%, or even from 5 to 12 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.5 to 10 wt%, such as from 1 to 10 wt%, such as from 1.5 to 10 wt%, such as from 2 to 10 wt%, or even from 5 to 10 wt% of crosslinker material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[244] The aqueous coating compositions may further comprise a solvent. The aqueous coating composition may comprise a single solvent or a mixture of solvents.
[245] The solvent suitably has sufficient volatility to essentially entirely evaporate from the aqueous coating composition during the curing process. As a non-limiting example, the curing process may be by heating at from 130-230 °C for from 1 -15 minutes.
[246] Suitable organic solvents include, but are not limited to the following: aliphatic hydrocarbons such as mineral spirits and high flash point naphtha; aromatic hydrocarbons such as benzene; toluene;
xylene; solvent naphtha 100, 150, 200; those available from Exxon-Mobil Chemical Company under the SOLVESSO (RTM) trade name; alcohols such as ethanol; n-propanol; isopropanol; and n-butanol; ketones such as acetone; cyclohexanone; methylisobutyl ketone; methyl ethyl ketone; esters such as ethyl acetate; butyl acetate; n-hexyl acetate; RHODIASOLV (RTM) RPDE (a blend of succinic and adipic esters commercially available from Rhodia); glycols such as butyl glycol; glycol ethers such as methoxypropanol; ethylene glycol monomethyl ether; ethylene glycol monobutyl ether and combinations thereof.
[247] The solvent, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts from 5 to 50 wt%, suitably from 6 to 40 wt%, such as from 7 to 30 wt%, or even from 8 to 25 wt% based on the total solid weight of the coating composition. The solvent, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts from 10 to 20 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[248] The aqueous coating compositions may further comprise a catalyst. Any catalyst typically used to catalyse crosslinking reactions between acrylic materials and crosslinking agents may be used. Suitable catalysts will be well known to the person skilled in the art. The catalyst may be a non-metal or a metal catalyst or a combination thereof. Suitable non-metal catalysts include, but are not limited to the following: phosphoric acid; blocked phosphoric acid; phosphatised resins such as, for example, phosphatised epoxy resins and phosphatised acrylic resins; CYCAT (RTM) XK 406 N (commercially available from Allnex); sulfuric acid; sulfonic acid; CYCAT 600 (commercially available from Allnex); NACURE (RTM) 5076 or NACURE 5925 (commercially available from King industries); acid phosphate catalyst such as NACURE XC 235 (commercially available from King Industries); and combinations thereof. Suitable metal catalysts will be well known to the person skilled in the art. Suitable metal catalysts include, but are not limited to the following: tin containing catalysts, such as monobutyl tin tris (2-ethylhexanoate); zirconium containing catalysts, such as KKAT (RTM) 4205 (commercially available from King Industries); titanate based catalysts, such as tetrabutyl titanate TnBT (commercially available from Sigma Aldrich); and combinations thereof.
[249] The catalyst, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in any suitable amount. The catalyst, when present, may be used in amounts from 0.001 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.001 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.05 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.1 to 2 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 1 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The catalyst, when present, may be used in amounts from 0.1 to 0.5 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[250] The aqueous coating composition may comprise at least 0.001 wt%, such as at least 0.01 wt%, such as at least 0.05 wt%, or even at least 0.1 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise up to 10 wt%, such as up to 5 wt%, such as up to 3 wt%, such as up to 2 wt%, such as up to 1 wt%, or even up to 0.5 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 10 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 10 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01
to 5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 5 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 3 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 3 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to
2 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 2 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 1 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 1 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 0.5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 0.5 wt% of catalyst based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[251] The aqueous coating composition may comprise phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof. Derivatives of phosphoric acid include, but are not limited to blocked phosphoric acid; phosphatised resins such as, for example, phosphatised epoxy resins and phosphatised acrylic resins; and combinations thereof. The aqueous coating composition may comprise phosphoric acid.
[252] The aqueous coating composition may comprise at least 0.001 wt%, such as at least 0.01 wt%, such as at least 0.05 wt%, or even at least 0.1 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise up to 10 wt%, such as up to 5 wt%, such as up to 3 wt%, such as up to 2 wt%, such as up to 1 wt%, or even up to 0.5 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 10 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 10 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 10 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 5 wt% phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 3 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to
3 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 3 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 2 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 2 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 2 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 1 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 1 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 1 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating composition may comprise from 0.001 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 0.5 wt%, such as from 0.05 wt% to 0.5 wt%, or even from 0.1 to 0.5 wt% of phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[253] Advantageously, it has been found by the present inventors that the use of a catalyst, such as phosphoric acid or derivatives thereof, in combination with the crosslinker material (c) may provide better adhesion than would typically be expected.
[254] The aqueous coating compositions may comprise a further resin material. Suitable further resin materials will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable examples of further resin materials include, but are not limited to the following: polyester resins; acrylic resins; polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resins; alkyd resins; polyurethane resins; polysiloxane resins; epoxy resins or combinations thereof.
[255] The aqueous coating compositions may comprise other optional materials well known in the art of formulating coatings, such as colorants, plasticizers, abrasion-resistant particles, anti-oxidants, hindered amine light stabilizers, UV light absorbers and stabilizers, surfactants, flow control agents, thixotropic agents, fillers, organic co-solvents, reactive diluents, catalysts, grind vehicles, lubricants, waxes and other customary auxiliaries.
[256] As used herein, the term "colorant" means any substance that imparts colour and/or other opacity and/or other visual effect to the composition. The colorant can be added to the aqueous coating compositions in any suitable form, such as discrete particles, dispersions, solutions and/or flakes. A single colorant or a mixture of two or more colorants can be used in the aqueous coatings. Suitable colorants are listed in U.S. Patent No. 8,614,286, column 7, line 2 through column 8, line 65, which is incorporated by reference herein. Examples for packaging aqueous coatings are those approved for food contact, such as titanium dioxide; iron oxides, such as black iron oxide; aluminium paste; aluminium powder such as aluminium flake; carbon black; ultramarine blue; phthalocyanines, such as phthalocyanine blue and phthalocyanine green; chromium oxides, such as chromium green oxide; graphite fibrils; ferried yellow; quindo red; and combinations thereof, and those listed in Article 178.3297 of the Code of Federal Regulations, which is incorporated by reference herein.
[257] The colorant, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in any suitable amount. The colorant, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts up to 90 wt%, such as up to 50 wt%, or even up to 10 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[258] Suitable lubricants will be well known to the person skilled in the art. Suitable examples of lubricants include, but are not limited to the following: carnauba wax and polyethylene type lubricants. The lubricant, when present, may be used in the aqueous coating composition in amounts of at least 0.01 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[259] Surfactants may optionally be added to the aqueous coating composition in order to aid in flow and wetting of the substrate. Suitable surfactants will be well known to the person skilled in the art. Suitably the surfactant, when present, is chosen to be compatible with food and/or beverage container applications. Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to the following: alkyl sulfates (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate); ether sulfates; phosphate esters; sulfonates; and their various alkali, ammonium, amine salts; aliphatic alcohol ethoxylates; alkyl phenol ethoxylates (e.g. nonyl phenol polyether); salts and/or combinations thereof. The surfactants, when present, may be present in amounts from 0.01 wt% to 10 wt%, suitably from 0.01 to 5 wt%, such as from 0.01 to 2 wt% based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[260] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of bisphenol A (BPA) and derivatives thereof. Derivatives of bisphenol A include, for example, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether (BADGE). The aqueous coating compositions may also be
substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of bisphenol F (BPF) and derivatives thereof. Derivatives of bisphenol F include, for example, bisphenol F diglycidyl ether (BPFG). The compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above may not be added to the composition intentionally but may be present in trace amounts because of unavoidable contamination from the environment. “Substantially free” refers to coating compositions, or components thereof, containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. “Essentially free” refers to coating compositions, or components thereof, containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “Completely free” refers to coating compositions, or components thereof, containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above.
[261] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of dialkyltin compounds, including oxides or other derivatives thereof. Examples of dialkyltin compounds include, but are not limited to the following: dibutyltindilaurate (DBTDL); dioctyltindilaurate; dimethyltin oxide; diethyltin oxide; dipropyltin oxide; dibutyltin oxide (DBTO); dioctyltinoxide (DOTO) or combinations thereof. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof.
[262] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of epoxy functional compounds. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof. The aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of epoxy material.
[263] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of melamine crosslinker materials. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof. The aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of melamine crosslinker material.
[264] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of formaldehyde. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than
100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof. The aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of formaldehyde.
[265] As reported herein, the amount of formaldehyde contained in the aqueous coating compositions are the amount of free formaldehyde and/or the amount of formaldehyde in vapor-phase emissions of the composition. As reported herein, the amount of free formaldehyde was determined by liquid chromatography according to ASTM D5910-96 (“Standard Test Method for Determination of Free Formaldehyde in Emulsion Polymers by Liquid Chromatography”). As reported herein, amount of formaldehyde in vapor-phase emissions of a composition was determined by emission testing according to ASTM D7706-17 (“Standard Practice for Rapid Screening of VOC Emissions from Products Using Micro-Scale Chambers”).
[266] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of styrene. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof. The aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of styrene.
[267] The aqueous coating compositions may be substantially free, may be essentially free or may be completely free of ethyl acrylate. By “substantially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 1000 parts per million (ppm) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “essentially free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 100 ppm of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof mentioned above. By “completely free” we mean to refer to coating compositions containing less than 20 parts per billion (ppb) of any of the compounds or derivatives thereof. The aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0 wt% of ethyl acrylate.
[268] The aqueous coating compositions optionally do not comprise an emulsion polymerised acrylic material. By the term “do not comprise” in this context is meant that the aqueous coating compositions contain less than 1 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.5 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.1 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.05wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.01 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.005 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition, such as less than 0.001 wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. The aqueous coating compositions may comprise 0
wt% of emulsion polymerised acrylic material based on the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition.
[269] The aqueous coating composition may be applied to a substrate, or a portion thereof, as a single layer or as part of a multi layer system. The aqueous coating composition may be applied as a single layer. The aqueous coating composition may be applied to an uncoated substrate. For the avoidance of doubt an uncoated substrate extends to a surface that is cleaned prior to application. The aqueous coating compositions may be applied on top of another paint layer as part of a multi layer system. For example, the aqueous coating composition may be applied on top of a primer. The aqueous coating compositions may form an intermediate layer or a top coat layer. The aqueous coating composition may be applied as the first coat of a multi coat system. The second, third, fourth etc. coats may comprise any suitable paint such as those containing, for example, epoxy resins; polyester resins; polyurethane resins; polysiloxane resins; hydrocarbon resins or combinations thereof. The second, third, fourth etc. coats may comprise polyester resins. The second, third, fourth etc. coats may be a liquid coating or a powder coating, suitably a powder coating. Suitably, the coating compositions may be applied on top of a primer.
[270] The aqueous coating compositions may be applied to a substrate once or multiple times.
[271] The aqueous coating compositions may be applied to any suitable substrate. The aqueous coating compositions may be applied to a metal substrate. Examples of suitable metal substrates include, but are not limited to, food and/or beverage packaging, components used to fabricate such packaging or monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes. Suitably, the food and/or beverage packaging may be a can. Examples of cans include, but are not limited to the following, two-piece cans, three-piece cans and the like. Suitable examples of monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes include, but are not limited to, deodorant and hair spray containers. Monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes may be aluminium monobloc aerosol cans and/or tubes. Suitably, the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to food and/or beverage packaging or components used to fabricate such packaging.
[272] The application of various pre-treatments and coatings to packaging is well established. Such treatments and/or coatings, for example, can be used in the case of metal cans, wherein the treatment and/or coating is used to retard or inhibit corrosion, provide a decorative coating, provide ease of handling during the manufacturing process, and the like. Coatings can be applied to the interior of such cans to prevent the contents from contacting the metal of the container. Contact between the metal and a food or beverage, for example, can lead to corrosion of a metal container, which can then contaminate the food or beverage. This can be true when the contents of the can are acidic in nature.
[273] The coatings applied to the interior of metal cans also help prevent corrosion in the headspace of the cans, which is the area between the fill line of the product and the can lid; corrosion in the headspace can be problematic with food products having a high salt content. Coatings can also be applied to the exterior of metal cans. Certain coating compositions may be applicable for use with coiled metal stock, such as the coiled metal stock from which the ends of cans are made (“can end stock’), and end caps and closures are made (“cap/closure stock’). Since coatings designed for use on can end stock and cap/closure stock may be applied prior to the piece being cut and stamped out of the coiled metal stock, they may be flexible and extensible. For example, such stock may be coated on both sides. Thereafter, the coated metal stock is punched. For can ends, the metal is then scored for the “pop-top" opening and
the pop-top ring is then attached with a pin that is separately fabricated. The end is then attached to the can body by an edge rolling process. A similar procedure is done for “easy open” can ends. For easy open can ends, a score substantially around the perimeter of the lid allows for easy opening or removing of the lid from the can, such as by means of a pull tab. For caps and closures, the cap/closure stock may be coated, such as by roll coating, and the cap or closure stamped out of the stock; it is possible, however, to coat the cap/closure after formation. Coatings for cans subjected to relatively stringent temperature and/or pressure requirements should also be resistant to popping, corrosion, blushing and/or blistering.
[274] Accordingly, the present disclosure is further directed to a food and/or beverage package coated at least in part with any of the aqueous coating compositions described above. In more detail, the present disclosure is further directed to a food and/or beverage package having a coating on at least a portion thereof, the coating being derived from any of the aqueous coating compositions described herein. A “package” is anything used to contain another item, such as for shipping from a point of manufacture to a consumer, and for subsequent storage by a consumer. A package will be therefore understood as something that is sealed so as to keep its contents free from deterioration until opened by a consumer. The manufacturer will often identify the length of time during which the food or beverage will be free from spoilage, which may range from several months to years. Thus, the present “package” is distinguished from a storage container or bakeware in which a consumer might make and/or store food; such a container would only maintain the freshness or integrity of the food item for a relatively short period. A package according to the present disclosure can be made of metal or non-metal, for example, plastic or laminate, and be in any form. An example of a suitable package is a laminate tube. Another example of a suitable package is metal can. The term “metal can” includes any type of metal can, container or any type of receptacle or portion thereof that is sealed by the food and/or beverage manufacturer to minimize or eliminate spoilage of the contents until such package is opened by the consumer. One example of a metal can is a food can; the term “food can(s)” is used herein to refer to cans, containers or any type of receptacle or portion thereof used to hold any type of food and/or beverage. The term “metal can(s)” specifically includes food cans and also specifically includes “can ends” including “E-Z open ends”, which may be stamped from can end stock and used in conjunction with the packaging of food and beverages. The term “metal cans” also specifically includes metal caps and/or closures such as bottle caps, screw top caps and lids of any size, lug caps, and the like. The metal cans can be used to hold other items as well, including, but not limited to, personal care products, bug spray, spray paint, and any other compound suitable for packaging in an aerosol can. The cans can include “two piece cans” and “three-piece cans” as well as drawn and ironed one-piece cans; such one piece cans often find application with aerosol products. Packages coated according to the present disclosure can also include plastic bottles, plastic tubes, laminates and flexible packaging, such as those made from PE, PP, PET and the like. Such packaging could hold, for example, food, toothpaste, personal care products and the like.
[275] The aqueous coating composition can be applied to the interior and/or the exterior of the package. The aqueous coating compositions and/or aqueous coating systems could also be applied as a rim coat to the bottom of the can. The rim coat functions to reduce friction for improved handling during the
continued fabrication and/or processing of the can. The aqueous coating compositions can also be applied to caps and/or closures; such application can include, for example, a protective varnish that is applied before and/or after formation of the cap/closure and/or a pigmented enamel post applied to the cap, such as those having a scored seam at the bottom of the cap. Decorated can stock can also be partially coated externally with the aqueous coating described herein, and the decorated, coated can stock used to form various metal cans.
[276] The aqueous coating composition may be a post repair coating composition, such as a post repair spray coating composition. Such coating compositions are specifically designed to be applied to and thereby coat a score line of the package. During the scoring operation, which is often achieved by stamping with a punch, the external varnish layer is cut and therefore the corrosion resistance of the metal substrate is compromised. This can be particularly problematic in a context where: i) the metal has been stressed and therefore its resistance to corrosion is weakened ii) the tin layer of the tinplate (where this is the substrate) is also cut; and/or ill) the next treatment step of the packaging is sterilisation, where the presence of heat and high humidity will create high corrosion conditions iv) The container is at the beginning of its life cycle which has a minimum of two years.
[277] The corrosion resistance of the metal substrate is restored by the application of a post repair coating (derived from a post repair coating composition) to the score line. This coating is often applied by spraying, such as by an airless spray process.
[278] The aqueous coating composition may be a single component coating composition (often referred to as a 1 K coating composition) or a multiple component coating composition, such as a two-component coating composition (often referred to as a 2K coating composition). Such terminology is well known in the art. In a multiple component coating composition, the components are provided separately but introduced to each other (by mixing, for example) prior to application. This could be hours before application, for example up to 24 hours before application, or up to 12 hours before application or up to 8 hours before application or up to 4 hours before application. In some instances, the multiple components may be introduced to each other (such as by mixing) during the application process, such as in line mixing, for example. If the aqueous coating composition is a multiple component coating composition, such as a 2-componenet coating composition, the acrylic material may be provided in a first component, while other materials may be provided in a further component, (such as a second component). For example, the crosslinker material may be provided in a further component (such as a second component).
[279] There is also provided a post repair coating composition comprising an aqueous coating composition as defined herein. The post repair coating composition may comprise a crosslinking agent, which may comprise carbodiimide.
[280] There is also provided a two-component post repair spray comprising an aqueous coating composition as defined herein, wherein the first component comprises an acrylic material and the second component comprises a crosslinker material, which crosslinker material may comprise carbodiimide.
[281] Metal coils, having wide application in many industries, are also substrates that can be coated according to the present disclosure. Coil coatings may comprise a colorant.
[282] The aqueous coating composition may be applied to at least a portion of the metal substrate. For example, when the aqueous coating compositions are applied to a food and/or beverage can, the aqueous coating compositions may be applied to at least a portion of an internal and/or external surface of said food and/or beverage can. When the aqueous coating composition is applied to a food and/or beverage can, the aqueous coating composition may be applied to at least a portion of an internal surface of said food and/or beverage can.
[283] The substrate may be formed from any suitable material. Suitable materials will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable examples include, but are not limited to the following: steel; tinplate; tinplate pre-treated with a protective material such as chromium, titanium, titanate or aluminium; tin-free steel (TFS); galvanised steel, such as for example electro-galvanised steel; aluminium; aluminium alloy; and combinations thereof. Suitably, the substrate may be formed from steel, tinplate, tin-plate pretreated with a protective material such as chromium, titanium, titanate or aluminium, tin-free steel (TFS), galvanised steel, such as for example electro-galvanised steel or combinations thereof.
[284] The aqueous coating composition may be applied to the substrate by any suitable method. Methods of applying the aqueous coating compositions will be well known to a person skilled in the art. Suitable application methods for the aqueous coating compositions include, but are not limited to the following: electrocoating such as electrodeposition; spraying; electrostatic spraying; dipping; rolling; brushing; and the like. The aqueous coating compositions may be applied to the substrate by spraying. Thus, the aqueous coating composition may be a spray composition. For the avoidance of doubt, by the term ‘spray composition’ and like terms as used herein is meant, unless specified otherwise, that the aqueous coating is suitable to be applied to a substrate by spraying, i.e. is sprayable. The aqueous coating compositions may be applied to a metal substrate by lamination. For example, a film may be formed from the aqueous coating composition, which film may subsequently be applied to a metal substrate (such as a package, for example a food or beverage can) by lamination thereon.
[285] The aqueous coating composition may be applied to any suitable dry film thickness. The aqueous coating composition may be applied to a dry film thickness from 0.5 to 100 microns (pm), suitably from 0.5 to 75 pm, such as from 1 to 50 pm, or even from 1 to 40 pm.
[286] The method of making an aqueous coating composition, according to the present disclosure comprises i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality;
wherein the first and/or second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
[287] The steps of the method may be combined in any combination, the method steps may be performed sequentially, for example in the order of i), ii), iii), iv) then v).
[288] There is also provided an aqueous coating composition obtainable by the method of the present disclosure. Suitably, this aqueous coating composition may be obtainable by carrying out the steps of the method sequentially. There is also provided an aqueous coating composition obtained by the method of the present disclosure. Suitably, this aqueous coating composition may be obtained by carrying out the steps of the method disclosed herein sequentially.
[289] As used herein, “solution polymerised” means a polymer that is formed by a polymerisation method whereby a monomer is substantially dissolved in a solvent and polymerised. Once said
monomer has been polymerised, the resultant solution polymerised acrylic material is suitably substantially soluble in said solvent.
[290] As used herein, “emulsion polymerised” means a polymer that is formed by a polymerisation method whereby a monomer is substantially dispersed in a carrier that includes water to form an aqueous dispersion and polymerised. Emulsion polymerisation techniques for preparing emulsion polymers are well known in the polymer arts and any conventional technique may be used. The emulsion polymerisation may start with an emulsion comprising, at least, water and a monomer that is substantially insoluble in the said water. The monomer may form an oil phase in the aqueous carrier. The resultant emulsion polymerised acrylic material is in the form of a stable emulsion of polymer microparticles in the aqueous medium.
[291] The term ”alk’ or “alkyl”, as used herein unless otherwise defined, relates to saturated hydrocarbon radicals being straight, branched, cyclic or polycyclic moieties or combinations thereof and contain 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. These radicals may be optionally substituted with a chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR19, OC(O)R20, C(O)R21, C(O)OR22, NR23R24, C(O)NR25R26, SR27, C(O)SR27, C(S)NR25R26, aryl or Het, wherein R19 to R27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialkylsiloxane groups or combinations thereof. Examples of such radicals may be independently selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, 2-methylbutyl, pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, 3-methylpentyl, octyl and the like.
[292] The term “alkylene”, as used herein, relates to a bivalent radical alkyl group as defined above. For example, an alkyl group such as ethyl which would be represented as -CH2-CH3, becomes ethylene, -CH2-CH2-, when represented as an alkylene. Other alkylene groups should be understood accordingly.
[293] The term “alkenyl’, as used herein, relates to hydrocarbon radicals having a double bond, such as up to 4, double bonds, being straight, branched, cyclic or polycyclic moieties or combinations thereof and containing from 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 10 carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 4 carbon atoms. These radicals may be optionally substituted with a hydroxyl, chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR19, OC(O)R20, C(O)R21, C(O)OR22, NR23R24, C(O)NR25R26, SR27, C(O)SR27, C(S)NR25R26, or aryl, wherein R19 to R27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialkylsiloxane groups. Examples of such radicals may be independently selected from alkenyl groups include vinyl, allyl, isopropenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, 1 -propenyl, 2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, isoprenyl, farnesyl, geranyl, geranylgeranyl and the like. The term “alkenylene”, as used herein, relates to a bivalent radical alkenyl group as defined above. For example, an alkenyl group such as ethenyl which would be represented as -CH=CH2, becomes ethenylene, -CH=CH-, when represented as an alkenylene. Other alkenylene groups should be understood accordingly.
[294] The term "alkynyl’, as used herein, relates to hydrocarbon radicals having a triple bond, such as up to 4, triple bonds, being straight, branched, cyclic or polycyclic moieties or combinations thereof and
having from 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 10 carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 4 carbon atoms. These radicals may be optionally substituted with a hydroxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR19, OC(O)R20, C(O)R21, C(O)OR22, NR23R24, C(O)NR25R26, SR27, C(O)SR27, C(S)NR25R26, or aryl, wherein R19 to R27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or lower alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialkylsiloxane groups. Examples of such radicals may be independently selected from alkynyl radicals include ethynyl, propynyl, propargyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl and the like. The term “alkynylene”, as used herein, relates to a bivalent radical alkynyl group as defined above. For example, an alkynyl group such as ethynyl which would be represented as -C=CH, becomes ethynylene, -C=C-, when represented as an alkynylene. Other alkynylene groups should be understood accordingly.
[295] The term “aryl’ as used herein, relates to an organic radical derived from an aromatic hydrocarbon by removal of one hydrogen, and includes any monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic carbon ring of up to 7 members in each ring, wherein at least one ring is aromatic. These radicals may be optionally substituted with a hydroxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, cyano, nitro, OR19, OC(O)R20, C(O)R21, C(O)OR22, NR23R24, C(O)NR25R26, SR27, C(O)SR27, C(S)NR25R26, aryl or Het, wherein R19 to R27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or lower alkyl, and/or be interrupted by oxygen or sulfur atoms, or by silano or dialky Isi Icon groups or combinations thereof. Examples of such radicals may be independently selected from phenyl, p-tolyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-(tert-butoxy)phenyl, 3-methyl-4-methoxyphenyl, 4- fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 3-aminophenyl, 3-acetamidophenyl, 4-acetamidophenyl, 2- methyl-3-acetamidophenyl, 2-methyl-3-aminophenyl, 3-methyl-4-aminophenyl, 2-amino-3- methylphenyl, 2,4-dimethyl-3-aminophenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 3-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2- naphthyl, 3-amino-1 -naphthyl, 2-methyl-3-amino-1 -naphthyl, 6-amino-2-naphthyl, 4,6-dimethoxy-2- naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, biphenyl, phenanthryl, anthryl or acenaphthyl and the like.
[296] The term “Hef, when used herein, includes four-to-twelve-membered, such as four-to-ten- membered ring systems, which rings contain a heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and mixtures thereof, and which rings may contain a double bond or be non-aromatic, partly aromatic or wholly aromatic in character. The ring systems may be monocyclic, bicyclic or fused. Each “Hef group identified herein is optionally substituted by a substituent selected from halo, cyano, nitro, oxo, lower alkyl (which alkyl group may itself be optionally substituted or terminated as defined below) OR19, OC(O)R20, C(O)R21, C(O)OR22, NR23R24, C(O)NR25R26, SR27, C(O)SR27 or C(S)NR25R26 wherein R19 to R27 each independently represent hydrogen, aryl or lower alkyl (which alkyl group itself may be optionally substituted or terminated as defined below). The term “Hef thus includes groups such as optionally substituted azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, furanyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, oxatriazolyl, thiatriazolyl, pyridazinyl, morpholinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, piperidinyl, pyrazolyl and piperazinyl. Substitution at Het may be at a carbon atom of the Het ring or, where appropriate, at a heteroatom.
[297] “Hef groups may also be in the form of an N oxide.
[298] For the avoidance of doubt, the reference to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or aralkyl in composite groups herein should be interpreted accordingly, for example the reference to alkyl in aminoalkyl or alk in alkoxyl should be interpreted as alk or alkyl above etc.
[299] As used herein, unless otherwise expressly specified, all numbers such as those expressing values, ranges, amounts or percentages may be read as if prefaced by the word "about", even if the term does not expressly appear. Also, the recitation of numerical ranges by endpoints includes all integer numbers and, where appropriate, fractions subsumed within that range (e.g. 1 to 5 can include 1 , 2, 3, 4 when referring to, for example, a number of elements, and can also include 1.5, 2, 2.75 and 3.80, when referring to, for example, measurements). The recitation of end points also includes the end point values themselves (e.g. from 1.0 to 5.0 includes both 1.0 and 5.0). Any numerical range recited herein is intended to include all sub-ranges subsumed therein.
[300] Singular encompasses plural and vice versa. For example, although reference is made herein to "a" crosslinker material, “a” neutralizer, “an” isocyanate, “an” alkanol amine, “the” residue of “an”, and the like, one or more of each of these and any other components can be used.
[301] As used herein, the term "polymer" refers to oligomers and both homopolymers and copolymers, and the prefix "poly" refers to two or more. “Including”, “for example” and like terms means “including but not limited to”.
[302] When ranges are given, any endpoints of those ranges and/or numbers within those ranges can be combined within the scope of the present disclosure.
[303] “Including’ and like terms means “including but not limited to”. Similarly, as used herein, the terms "on", "applied on/over", "formed on/over", "deposited on/over", "overlay" and "provided on/over" mean formed, overlay, deposited, or provided on but not necessarily in contact with the surface. For example, a coating layer "formed over" a substrate does not preclude the presence of another coating layer of the same or different composition located between the formed coating layer and the substrate.
[304] The terms "comprising", "comprises" and "comprised of’ as used herein are synonymous with "including", "includes" or "containing’, "contains", and are inclusive or open-ended and do not exclude additional, non-recited members, elements or method steps. Additionally, although the present disclosure has been described in terms of “comprising’, the coating compositions detailed herein may also be described as “consisting essentially of’ or “consisting of’. For example while the disclosure has been described in terms of a coating comprising a + b + c + d, a coating consisting essentially of and/or consisting of a + b + c + d is also within the present scope. In this context, ‘consisting essentially of means that any additional coating components will not materially affect the effectiveness of the coating.
[305] All of the features contained herein may be combined with any of the above aspects and in any combination.
[306] For a better understanding of the present disclosure, and to show how embodiments of the same may be carried into effect, reference will now be made, by way of example, to the following experimental data.
EXAMPLES
RESIN SYNTHESIS
[307] All parts and percentages mentioned herein are by weight unless otherwise indicated.
[308] NBMA used throughout the examples was commercially sourced as 50 wt% supplied in organic solvent from TCI.
Example 1 - Preparation of Two-Stage Polymerised Acrylic Dispersion
[309] Polymer Stage-1 : 397.9 g Hydroxyethyl Methacrylate, 258.53 g NBMA (n-butoxmethyl acrylamide), 13.99 g Acrylic Acid, 971.33 Methyl Methacrylate, 499.43 g n-Butyl Acrylate and 188.21 g Hydroxy Ethyl Acrylate were premixed in a conical flask. A 12-liter flask was equipped with a motor driven stainless steel stir blade, a water-cooled condenser, a nitrogen inlet, and a heating mantle with a thermometer connected through a temperature feedback control device. Added to the 12-liter flask was 1429.76 g Dowanol DPM and 209.51 g MEK. The flask was heated to 94 °C. At 94 °C, premixed solution of 48.91 g T-Butyl Peroctoate and 156.08 g Dowanol DPM, and monomer premix solution was co-fed over 185 minutes, after 5 minutes of the initiator mix. The batch was held for 1 hour.
[310] Polymer Stage-2: 106.86 g Hydroxyethyl Methacrylate, 62.61 g NBMA (n-Butoxy Methyl Acrylamide), 104.59 g Acrylic Acid, 220.53 Methyl Methacrylate, 168.62 g n-Butyl Acrylate and 21 .52 g Hydroxy Ethyl Acrylate were premixed in a conical flask. In a separate conical flask, 87.97g of Dowanol DPM and 13.88 g T-Butyl Peroctoate was premixed. Both the monomer premix and initiator premixes were then co-fed into stage-1 polymer over 1 hour, rinsed with 45.83 g of Dowanol DPM. After the addition, the batch was held for 1 hour. 19.3 g of Dowanol DPM and 19.34 g of T-Butyl Peroctoate premixed, added over 30 minutes, rinsed with 15.69 g of MEK and held for 1 hour. After the hold, the flask temperature reduced to 90 °C and neutralized with a mixture of 73.34 g dimethylethanolamine and 67.61 g of De-lonized Water, followed by 4482.26 g De-lonized water over 30 minutes. The heat discontinued and the batch cooled for analysis and formulation.
Example 2 - Preparation of Two-Staae Polymerised Acrylic Dispersion
[311] A two stage-acrylic polymer was prepared from the components of Table 1 as follows:
Table 1 - Two stage-acrylic polymer 2
Ingredients Parts by Weight
Polymer
Stage 1
Charge #1
Dowanol DPM 609.07
N-Butanol 979.55
Methyl ethyl ketone 232.79
Charge #2
Acrylic acid 15.54 n-Butyl acrylate 228.62
Methyl methacrylate 1434.96
Hydroxyethyl methacrylate 442.11
n-Butoxy meth acrylamide (NBMA) 287.25
Hydroxyethyl acrylate 209.13
Charge #3 tert-Butyl peroctoate 54.34
Dowanol DPM 173.43
Methyl ethyl ketone 116.5
Polymer Stage 2
Charge #4
Acrylic acid 116.21 n-Butyl acrylate g-| 4-1
Methyl methacrylate 325.8
Hydroxyethyl methacrylate 118.73 n-Butoxy meth acrylamide (NBMA) 69.57
Hydroxyethyl acrylate 23.91
Vinyl phosphonic acid 17.53
Charge #5 tert-Butyl peroctoate 15.43
Methyl ethyl ketone 65.67
Dowanol DPM 97.75
Charge #6
Dowanol DPM 50.92
Charge #7 tert-Butyl peroctoate 15.43
Dowanol DPM 97.75
Charge # 8
Methyl ethyl ketone 65.67
Charge #9
Dimethylethanolamine 88.00
DI Water 75.13
Charge #10
DI Water 4972.02
[312] Preparation of polymer stage 1 : A 12-liter round bottom, four-necked flask equipped with an agitator, a nitrogen inlet tube, a thermometer, and a reflux condenser was charged with solvent mixture of Charge #1. The flask was heated gradually to reflux at around 94°C. At 94°C, Charge #2 and #3 were added to the flask at a steady rate over 180 minutes through addition column. When completed, the batch was held at about 94°C for 60 minutes.
[313] Preparation of polymer stage 2: After the hold was over, charge #5 was added to the flask at steady state over 60 minutes through addition column followed by solvent rinse of charge #6. The batch was held for 1 hour around 94°C. After the 1 -hour hold was over, charge #7 was added over 30 minutes and was rinsed with charge #8. The batch was held for 1 hour at 94 C and the flask temperature was then reduced to 90 C and neutralized with the mixture of charge #9 followed by addition of charge #10 over 30 minutes. The heat discontinued and the batch was cooled for analysis and formulation.
[314] The batch yielded a polymer dispersion with 29.2 % NV and a Mn of 10,680 Daltons.
[315] A batch was also attempted with MEK instead of n-Butanol in charge #1 , however the batch gelled and was not workable.
Crosslinker material
[316] 520 g xylene and 520 g maleic anhydride were added to a four neck round bottom flask equipped with a mechanical stir blade, thermocouple and reflux condenser. The mixture was heated to a set point of 60°C under a nitrogen atmosphere. Once the maleic anhydride was dissolved, 2.6 g of octylamine was added and the mixture was held for 5 minutes. Next the mixture was heated to 140°C set point. At 140°C a solution of 434.2 g xylene and 52 g di-tertiary butyl peroxide was added over a time period of two hours via an addition funnel. After the addition was complete, the resin mixture was then held at 140°C for two hours. Next the mixture was cooled to 110°C to prepare the solution for vacuum distillation. At 110°C the xylene solvent was removed by vacuum distillation. After 2 hours the distillation process was stopped and 285 g of DI water was added over 60 minutes. After this addition, the reactor was set up with a Dean-Stark apparatus to remove residual xylene. After 1 hour, 664 g of DI water was added over 60 min and the reaction was held at 110°C for 15 min. Next the mixture was cooled to 70°C. After cooling to 70°C, 468 g of dimethylethanolamine was added over 60 min. After this addition, the mixture was held for 15 min then poured out into a suitable container. The resultant crosslinker material had a solids content of 64.5% as measured by 110°C solids test.
COATING EXAMPLES
[317] Coating Examples 1 -6 are provided in Table 2. Each material in Table 2 was added under stirring. A Mettler AE 200 weighing balance available from the Mettler - Toledo Corporation was used to weigh each material. The paints were allowed to equilibrate for 16 hours before the paints were coated onto flat Aluminum cans.
130 % solution of ARADUR 3380-1 CH in Cyclohexanone solvent. ARADUR 3380-1 CH is Benzene-1 ,2.4-tricarboxylic acid 1.2- anhvdride (trimellitic anhydride), oligomeric reaction products with ethane-1 ,2-diol and glycerol, commercially available from Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe)BVBA.
2phenol formaldehyde resin - commercially available from SI Group.
COATING SUBSTRATES
[318] Twelve ounce Aluminum beverage cans with no coating inside were obtained from the Metal Container Corporation production line located in Arnold, Missouri, USA. The cans were coated with exterior ink and exterior coating. The cans were cut, flattened and attached by tape to an Aluminum backing panel in order to have a flat surface for wire bar drawdowns.
TESTING METHODS
Film Weight
[319] Average coating film weight was measured using a SENCON SI9600 Coating Thickness Gauge. The target film weight was approximately 2.5 milligrams per square inch. Commercial spray film weights can vary from 75 milligrams for Beer Weight per 12 oz. can up to 140 milligrams for Energy Weight per 12 oz. can.
Adhesion and Blush/Blistering
[320] The coated flat Aluminum cans were cut into 2 in by 4 in panels and placed in a rack. Four hundred grams of a 1% JOY detergent solution made in deionized water was added to an 800 milliliter beaker. The solution of JOY detergent in the beaker was heated using a temperature controlled Hot Plate. The panels were added as soon as the solution of detergent reached 82° C and kept in the solution for 10 minutes. The JOY detergent solution covered about the bottom half of the test panels. The panels were removed and tested for adhesion.
[321] A second set of 2 in by 4 in coated flat Aluminum cans were tested using a 3% or 6% Acetic Acid solution made in deionized water. Four hundred grams of the 3% or 6% Acetic Acid solution was added to an 800 milliliter beaker. The solution of Acetic Acid in the beaker was heated using a temperature controlled Hot Plate. The panels were added as soon as the solution of Acetic Acid started boiling and
kept in the solution for thirty minutes. The Acetic Acid solution covered about the bottom half of the test panels. The panels were removed and tested for blushing.
[322] The panels were tested for coating adhesion to the Aluminum substrate using BYK Cross-Cut Tester Kit # 5127 with 1.5 mm blade. The loss percentage is in the area of the scribe. Visual references are available to rate the adhesion loss according to the percentages.
MEK Resistance
[323] The MEK resistance was determined using a two pound ball hammer using MEK soaked gauze covering the ball end of the hammer. The number of double rubs until the coating failed to the substrate was recorded. The equipment used was a 2-pound ball-peen hammer, MEK solvent, an Aluminum guide, masking tape to adhere the test panel to a flat surface, rubber band and Gauze (Fisher Brand 4x4 12 ply)
The MEK rub test method was:
The test panel was placed on a flat surface.
A piece of Fisher Brand 4x4 12 ply gauze was arranged over the ball end of a two-pound ballpeen hammer. The gauze was snugly held in place with a rubber band in such a fashion that no wrinkles were formed.
The cloth was saturated with the appropriate solvent for the material being tested, and the gauze was re-saturated every 25 double rubs.
The saturated gauze was immediately rubbed over the test area using a back and forth stroke of about 4 to 6 inches without exerting any downward or upward pressure on the hammer handle. The weight of the hammer controlled the downward pressure.
This back and forth action was continued counting one "double rub" for each forward and backward motion completed until bare substrate was exposed in the center of the strip where the rubs were performed.
The test result was recorded as the number of double rubs required to expose bare substrate in the center of the rub strip.
TEST DATA
[324] Wire drawdown bars were used to coat the flat Aluminum cans. An electric box oven was used for curing. The box oven was set at 380 “F and the coated flat Aluminum cans were baked for 3 minutes.
[325] The test results of the coating formulations from Table 2 are recorded in Tables 3 and 4. As a comparative example, commercially available PPG 2012-827B was used, which was a spray applied coating for Aluminum beverage cans sold by PPG Industries and was based on an emulsion acrylic coating composition that contained resol-formaldehyde crosslinker technology. PPG 2012-827B was not formed from a monomer component containing acrylamide.
Table 3 : Coating Properties
[326] Coating Examples 1 and 2 performed as well as the PPG 2012-827B, a commercially available coating for the inside of beverage cans in screening tests. No blushing and no other film defect was observed after the testing. The coatings maintained perfect adhesion after the JOY detergent and Acetic Acid testing. The MEK resistance of the Coating Examples 1 and 2 is equivalent or better than the commercially available coating (PPG 2012-827B).
[327] Coating Examples 3 to 6 provided good results in screening tests. No blushing and no other film defect was observed after the testing. The coatings maintained perfect adhesion after the Acetic Acid testing.
[328] Attention is directed to all papers and documents which are filed concurrently with or previous to this specification in connection with this application and which are open to public inspection with this specification, and the contents of all such papers and documents are incorporated herein by reference.
[329] All of the features disclosed in this specification (including any accompanying claims, abstract and drawings), and/or all of the steps of any method or process so disclosed, may be combined in any combination, except combinations where at least some of such features and/or steps are mutually exclusive. Each feature disclosed in this specification (including any accompanying claims, abstract and
drawings) may be replaced by alternative features serving the same, equivalent or similar purpose, unless expressly stated otherwise. Thus, unless expressly stated otherwise, each feature disclosed is one example only of a generic series of equivalent or similar features.
[330] The present disclosure is not restricted to the details of the foregoing embodiment(s). The present disclosure extends to any novel one, or any novel combination, of the features disclosed in this specification (including any accompanying claims, abstract and drawings), or to any novel one, or any novel combination, of the steps of any method or process so disclosed.
Claims
1 . An aqueous coating composition comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a)”; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H;
70 wherein the coating composition is substantially free of formaldehyde; and wherein when only one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I, then the wt% ratio of the acrylamide containing acrylic material to the non-acrylamide containing acrylic material is less than 1.2:1. An aqueous coating composition, obtainable by a process comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier; ii) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; wherein the first monomer component and/or the second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water. eous coating composition comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a)”; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; and wherein at least one of the acrylic material or further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material. An aqueous coating composition, comprising: a) an acrylic material which comprises acid functionality; b) a neutraliser operable to at least partially neutralise the acid functionality of the acrylic material; c) a carrier comprising water; and d) a further acrylic material, different from the acrylic material “a/’; wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof; wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
73
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and
Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 1 to 4, wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises a solution polymerised acrylic material. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 1 , 2 or 4, wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 1 to 6 wherein the acrylic material comprises a solution polymerised acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises an emulsion polymerised acrylic material. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
X1 represents a linear or branched alkyl, or a -Y-O-Z group wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or H;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein R1 represents H or C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group, such as R1 represents H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n- butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group, or even such as R1 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group and/or wherein X1 represents a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group; or X1 represents a -Y-O-Z group; wherein Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, such as C1-C10 alkylene bridging group, such as Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group, such as Ci-Cs alkylene bridging group, such as C1-C4 alkylene bridging group, such as Y may represent methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene or decylene, or even such as Y represents methylene, ethylene or propylene, and Z represents a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as C2-C7 alkyl group, such as C2-C6 alkyl group, or H, such as Z represents H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group, or even such as Z represents C2-C6 alkyl group, such as ethyl, propyl, butyl group, pentyl or hexyl; and/or wherein X2 represents a linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl group, such as C1-C10 alkyl group, such as Ci to Cs alkyl group, such as Ci-Cs alkyl group, such as C1-C4 alkyl group, or H, such as X2 represents H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl,
decyl, cyclohexyl or cycloheptyl group, or even such as X2 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl group. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein R1 represents H or C1-C4 alkyl group; X1 represents a -Y-O-Z group wherein Y represents a C1-C4 alkylene bridging group and Z represents a C2-C7 alkyl group; and X2 represents H. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein R1 represents H or methyl; X1 represents a -Y-O-Z group wherein Y represents a methylene or ethylene bridging group and Z represents a Cs-Ce alkyl group; and X2 represents H. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the solution polymerised acrylic material and/or further solution polymerised acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising n-butoxymethyl acrylamide (NBMA). An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the solution polymerised acrylic material and/or further solution polymerised acrylic material comprises at least 0.5 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the solution polymerised acrylic material and/or further solution polymerised acrylic material, such as at least 1 wt%, such as at least 1 .5 wt%, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the further solution polymerised acrylic material comprises at least 1 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 2 wt%, such as at least 3 wt%, such as at least 4 wt%, such as at least 5 wt%. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the further solution polymerised acrylic material comprises at least 20 wt% acrylamide monomer of formula I based on the total weight of the monomers in the further acrylic material, such as at least 30 wt%, such as at least 40 wt% An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein at least one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising an optionally substituted styrene monomer or a styrene-mimicking ethylenically unsaturated monomer. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 16, wherein the substituted styrene monomer comprises a 2, 3, or 4- alkyl or aryl substituted styrene.
An aqueous coating composition according to either of claim 16 or claim 17, wherein the substituted styrene monomer is selected from alpha-methyl styrene; 3,4-alpha-methyl styrene; methyl styrenes such as 2-methyl styrene, 4-methyl styrene (vinyl toluene) and the like; dimethyl styrenes such as 2,3-dimethyl styrene; 2-ethyl styrene; 4-tertbutylstyrene; 4-methoxystyrene; 4- phenylstyrene; 4-phenoxy styrene; 4-propyl styrene; 4-benzylstyrene; 4-cyclohexyl styrene; 4- dodecyl styrene; 4-(phenyl butyl)styrene; 2-methyl-4-isopopyl styrene; 2-ethyl-4-benzyl styrene; halostyrenes such as 4-chlorostyrene, 2,5-dichlorostyrene, 3,4-dichlorostyrene, 2,6- dichlorostyrene, 4-fluorostyrene; divinylbenzene; isopropyl styrene, t-butyl styrene; trans-beta- styrene or combinations thereof. An aqueous coating according to claim 16, wherein the styrene-mimicking ethylenically unsaturated monomers comprise an optionally saturated monocyclic group, for example, benzyl acrylate, benzyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate or cyclohexyl methacrylate. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein at least one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising terpene monomers or derivatives thereof, rosin monomers or derivatives thereof, cardanol monomers or derivatives thereof. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 20, wherein the terpene monomers or derivates thereof are selected from at least one of monoterpenes such as a-pinene, p-pinene, camphene, sabinene, limonene and myrcene; sesquiterpenes such as bisabolene and nerolidol; diterpenes. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein at least one of the acrylic material or the further acrylic material is formed from a monomer component comprising alkyl (alk)acrylate, alkyl (meth)acrylate, (alk)acrylic acid or vinyl monomers; wherein the alkyl group is optionally cyclic, for example, isobornyl(methyl)acrylate or monomers derived from isosorbide and/or tetramethyl cyclobutene. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 1 to 3 or 5 to 22, wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component, comprises a monomer that comprises a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 4 or 23, wherein the monomer component of the further acrylic material/the second monomer component comprises a monomer having a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof.
77 An aqueous coating composition according to claim 24, wherein the monomer component of the further acrylic material/the second monomer component further comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 4 or 23 to 25, wherein the monomer that comprises a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof comprises vinylsulfonic acid, a vinylsulfate, vinylphosphonic acid and/or a vinylphosphate. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 4 or 23 to 26, wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component, comprises from >0.1 % of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s). An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 4 or 23 to 27, wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer component, comprises <20% of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s). An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 4 or 23 to 28, wherein the monomer component of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, such as the first and/or second monomer, component comprises <10% of a monomer comprising a sulfonic acid-, a sulfate-, a phosphonic acid- and/or a phosphate- functional group or precursor thereof by total weight of the monomers of the monomer component(s). An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material, or a coating formed from the coating composition, has a Tg of >50°C. An aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, further comprising a crosslinker material. An aqueous coating composition according claim 31 , wherein the crosslinker material is present in an amount of less than 40 wt% of the total solid weight of the aqueous coating composition. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the crosslinker material comprises the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising:
(i) a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof;
78
(ii) an ethylenically unsaturated monomer; and
(iii) an alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the crosslinker material comprises the reaction product of a reaction mixture comprising:
(i) >70% by weight of a cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof by total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed;
(ii) optionally, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer;
(iii) and optionally, an alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivate thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, thiol and/or water, when present; and wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 100 mg KOH/g. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 33 or 34, wherein the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride comprises maleic anhydride. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 35, wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomer comprises a hydroxyl functional monomer. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 36, wherein the hydroxyl functional monomer comprises hydroxyethyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, hydroxymethyl acrylate, hydroxymethyl methacrylate, hydroxypropyl acrylate, hydroxypropyl methacrylate, hydroxybutyl acrylate, hydroxybutyl methacrylate, hydroxypentyl acrylate, hydroxypentyl acrylate, hydroxyhexyl methacrylate, hydroxyhexyl methacrylate, methyl 2-(hydroxymethyl)acrylate and/or ethyl 2-(hydroxymethyl)acrylate. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 37, wherein the crosslinker material comprises >2.5% hydroxyl functional ethylenically unsaturated monomer based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 38, wherein the unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof comprises maleic anhydride and the ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s) comprises a hydroxyl functional monomer with styrene, isobutyl vinyl ether and/or vinyl acetate.
79 An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 39, wherein the crosslinker material has a Tg of at least 50°C. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 40, wherein the crosslinker material has a Tg of at least 100°C. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 41 , wherein the reaction mixture comprises an alcohol, amine, and/or thiol, wherein at least a portion of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with the alcohol, amine, and/or thiol. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims claim 33 to 42, wherein the amine and/or thiol is hydroxy functional. An aqueous coating composition according to claim 43, wherein the hydroxy functional amine comprises dimethanolamine; diethanolamine, dipropanolamine and/or diisopropanolamine. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 44, wherein the alcohol comprises ethanol. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 45, wherein the crosslinker material comprises the reaction product of a reaction mixture wherein >10% of the cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof is reacted with an amine and/or thiol comprising a hydroxy group, and/or an alcohol comprising two or more hydroxy groups. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 46, wherein the crosslinker material comprises at least 75 wt% of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 47, wherein the crosslinker material comprises at least 90 wt% of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 48, wherein the crosslinker material comprises at least 99 wt% of cyclic unsaturated acid anhydride and/or diacid derivative thereof based on the total solid weight of the monomers from which the crosslinker material is formed.
80 An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 49, wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 200 mg KOH/g. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 50, wherein the crosslinker material has an acid number of at least 500 mg KOH/g. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 51 , wherein the crosslinker material has a hydroxyl value of >2 mg KOH/g. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 52, wherein the crosslinker material has a hydroxyl value of >10 mg KOH/g. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 53, wherein crosslinker material has an Mn of at least 300 Da. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 54, wherein the crosslinker material has a Mn of up to 5,000 Da. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 31 to 55, wherein the crosslinker material comprises trimellitic anhydride or a derivative thereof. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 33 to 56, wherein the crosslinker material is substantially free of formaldehyde. An aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 31 to 57, wherein the crosslinker material comprises a phenolic resin. A package coated on at least a portion thereof with a coating, the coating being derived from an aqueous coating composition of any preceding claim. A package or aqueous coating composition according to any preceding claim, wherein the aqueous coating composition is a spray composition. A package according to any preceding claim, wherein the package is a food or beverage can. A post repair spray coating composition comprising an aqueous coating composition according to any of claims 1 -58. A method of making an aqueous coating composition, the method comprising: i) mixing a first monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with a carrier;
81
II) polymerising the first monomer component in the carrier to form an acrylic material; ill) mixing a second monomer component comprising an acrylic monomer with the acrylic material and carrier; polymerising said second monomer component, in the presence of the acrylic material and carrier, to form a further acrylic material, wherein at least one of the acrylic material and the further acrylic material comprises acid functionality; wherein the first and/or second monomer component comprises an acrylamide monomer of formula I:
Formula I wherein R1 represents a H or alkyl group; and
Formula II wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents linear or branched alkyl group, or is according to formula II, or H;
X3 represents a H or alkyl group;
R2 represents a H or alkyl group;
X2 represents a linear or branched alkyl, H or a -Y-O-Z group; wherein
Y represents a bivalent linear or branched alkylene bridging group, and Z represents a linear or branched alkyl group, or H; iv) at least partially neutralising the acid functionality of the acrylic material and/or the further acrylic material with a neutraliser; and v) dispersing the acrylic material and the further acrylic material in water.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US202163246901P | 2021-09-22 | 2021-09-22 | |
| US63/246,901 | 2021-09-22 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2023049779A1 true WO2023049779A1 (en) | 2023-03-30 |
Family
ID=84194935
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/US2022/076825 Ceased WO2023049779A1 (en) | 2021-09-22 | 2022-09-22 | An aqueous coating composition and a package coated therewith |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2023049779A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2025056403A1 (en) * | 2023-09-12 | 2025-03-20 | Akzo Nobel Coatings International B.V. | Aqueous coating composition comprising a dispersed acrylic copolymer |
Citations (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2005179491A (en) * | 2003-12-19 | 2005-07-07 | Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd | Water-based paint composition containing polymer emulsion |
| JP2006077142A (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2006-03-23 | Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd | Water-based paint composition containing polymer emulsion |
| US20120302690A1 (en) * | 2011-05-27 | 2012-11-29 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Grafted acrylic comprising water soluble and water insoluble portions and lattices and coatings comprising the same |
| US8614286B2 (en) | 2008-09-02 | 2013-12-24 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Biomass derived radiation curable liquid coatings |
| JP2015196812A (en) * | 2014-04-03 | 2015-11-09 | 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 | Thermosetting composition and can coating composition |
| WO2017122171A2 (en) | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Carbodiimide curing for packaging coating compositions |
| WO2017123955A1 (en) | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Hydroxy functional alkyl polyurea crosslinkers |
| WO2020123893A1 (en) | 2018-12-13 | 2020-06-18 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Polyhydroxyalkylamide materials for use as crosslinkers |
| KR20210088635A (en) * | 2018-11-06 | 2021-07-14 | 에스뻬쎄엠 에스아 | Self-Reversible Reversed-Phase Polymer Emulsion |
-
2022
- 2022-09-22 WO PCT/US2022/076825 patent/WO2023049779A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2005179491A (en) * | 2003-12-19 | 2005-07-07 | Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd | Water-based paint composition containing polymer emulsion |
| JP2006077142A (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2006-03-23 | Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd | Water-based paint composition containing polymer emulsion |
| US8614286B2 (en) | 2008-09-02 | 2013-12-24 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Biomass derived radiation curable liquid coatings |
| US20120302690A1 (en) * | 2011-05-27 | 2012-11-29 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Grafted acrylic comprising water soluble and water insoluble portions and lattices and coatings comprising the same |
| JP2015196812A (en) * | 2014-04-03 | 2015-11-09 | 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 | Thermosetting composition and can coating composition |
| WO2017122171A2 (en) | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Carbodiimide curing for packaging coating compositions |
| WO2017123955A1 (en) | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Hydroxy functional alkyl polyurea crosslinkers |
| KR20210088635A (en) * | 2018-11-06 | 2021-07-14 | 에스뻬쎄엠 에스아 | Self-Reversible Reversed-Phase Polymer Emulsion |
| WO2020123893A1 (en) | 2018-12-13 | 2020-06-18 | Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. | Polyhydroxyalkylamide materials for use as crosslinkers |
Non-Patent Citations (2)
| Title |
|---|
| "The Chemistry and Application of Phenolic Resins or Phenoplasts", vol. V, 1997, JOHN WILEY AND SONS |
| POLYMERIC SURFACTANTS IN EMULSION POLYMERIZATION, vol. 35, no. 36, 1990, pages 467 - 475 |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2025056403A1 (en) * | 2023-09-12 | 2025-03-20 | Akzo Nobel Coatings International B.V. | Aqueous coating composition comprising a dispersed acrylic copolymer |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11981764B2 (en) | Acrylic polyester resin and an aqueous coating composition containing the same | |
| CN101517020B (en) | Food and beverage containers and methods of coating | |
| RU2737890C2 (en) | Carbodiimide hardening coating compositions intended for packaging | |
| US8927652B2 (en) | Coating compositions for food and beverage containers | |
| EP3724239B1 (en) | A coating composition | |
| JP7324705B2 (en) | Latex coating composition with reduced flavor scalping properties | |
| BRPI0614747A2 (en) | hardenable coating composition, method for coating a metallic substrate with a hardenable packaging system, and foodstuff metal container | |
| KR20140125788A (en) | Methods and materials for the functionalization of polymers and coatings including functionalized polymer | |
| US12018110B2 (en) | Acrylic polyester resin and an aqueous coating composition containing the same | |
| WO2016118502A1 (en) | Polymers, coating compositions, coated articles, and methods related thereto | |
| WO2022169971A1 (en) | An aqueous coating composition and a package coated therewith | |
| WO2023049779A1 (en) | An aqueous coating composition and a package coated therewith | |
| US20190185706A1 (en) | Polyoxazoline Curing for Packaging Coating Compositions | |
| CN116964158A (en) | Coating composition | |
| CN115867620A (en) | Coating composition for beverage containers | |
| US20250019560A1 (en) | Acrylic materials and uses thereof | |
| WO2022159617A1 (en) | A coating composition |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22801645 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 22801645 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |